background image

SUBCHAPTER D—AIRMEN 

PART 60—FLIGHT SIMULATION 

TRAINING DEVICE INITIAL AND 
CONTINUING QUALIFICATION 
AND USE 

Sec. 
60.1

Applicability. 

60.2

Applicability of sponsor rules to per-

sons who are not sponsors and who are 
engaged in certain unauthorized activi-
ties. 

60.3

Definitions. 

60.4

Qualification Performance Standards. 

60.5

Quality management system. 

60.7

Sponsor qualification requirements. 

60.9

Additional responsibilities of the spon-

sor. 

60.11

FSTD use. 

60.13

FSTD objective data requirements. 

60.14

Special equipment and personnel re-

quirements for qualification of the 
FSTD. 

60.15

Initial qualification requirements. 

60.16

Additional qualifications for a cur-

rently qualified FSTD. 

60.17

Previously qualified FSTDs. 

60.19

Inspection, continuing qualification 

evaluation, and maintenance require-
ments. 

60.20

Logging FSTD discrepancies. 

60.21

Interim qualification of FSTDs for 

new aircraft types or models. 

60.23

Modifications to FSTDs. 

60.25

Operation with missing, malfunc-

tioning, or inoperative components. 

60.27

Automatic loss of qualification and 

procedures for restoration of qualifica-
tion. 

60.29

Other losses of qualification and pro-

cedures for restoration of qualification. 

60.31

Recordkeeping and reporting. 

60.33

Applications, logbooks, reports, and 

records: Fraud, falsification, or incorrect 
statements. 

60.35

Specific full flight simulator compli-

ance requirements. 

60.37

FSTD qualification on the basis of a 

Bilateral Aviation Safety Agreement 
(BASA). 

A

PPENDIX

TO

P

ART

60—Q

UALIFICATION

P

ER

-

FORMANCE

S

TANDARDS

FOR

A

IRPLANE

 

F

ULL

F

LIGHT

S

IMULATORS

 

A

PPENDIX

TO

P

ART

60—Q

UALIFICATION

P

ER

-

FORMANCE

S

TANDARDS

FOR

A

IRPLANE

 

F

LIGHT

T

RAINING

D

EVICES

 

A

PPENDIX

TO

P

ART

60—Q

UALIFICATION

P

ER

-

FORMANCE

S

TANDARDS

FOR

H

ELICOPTER

 

F

ULL

F

LIGHT

S

IMULATORS

 

A

PPENDIX

TO

P

ART

60—Q

UALIFICATION

P

ER

-

FORMANCE

S

TANDARDS

FOR

H

ELICOPTER

 

F

LIGHT

T

RAINING

D

EVICES

 

A

PPENDIX

TO

P

ART

60—Q

UALIFICATION

P

ER

-

FORMANCE

S

TANDARDS FOR

Q

UALITY

M

AN

-

AGEMENT

S

YSTEMS FOR

F

LIGHT

S

IMULA

-

TION

T

RAINING

D

EVICES

 

A

PPENDIX

TO

P

ART

60—D

EFINITIONS AND

A

B

-

BREVIATIONS

FOR

F

LIGHT

S

IMULATION

 

T

RAINING

D

EVICES

 

A

UTHORITY

: 49 U.S.C. 106(f), 106(g), 40113, 

and 44701; Pub. L. 111–216, 124 Stat. 2348 (49 
U.S.C. 44701 note) 

S

OURCE

: Docket No. FAA–2002–12461, 71 FR 

63426, Oct. 30, 2006, unless otherwise noted. 

§ 60.1

Applicability. 

(a) This part prescribes the rules gov-

erning the initial and continuing quali-
fication and use of all aircraft flight 
simulation training devices (FSTD) 
used for meeting training, evaluation, 
or flight experience requirements of 
this chapter for flight crewmember cer-
tification or qualification. 

(b) The rules of this part apply to 

each person using or applying to use an 
FSTD to meet any requirement of this 
chapter. 

(c) The requirements of § 60.33 regard-

ing falsification of applications, 
records, or reports also apply to each 
person who uses an FSTD for training, 
evaluation, or obtaining flight experi-
ence required for flight crewmember 
certification or qualification under 
this chapter. 

§ 60.2

Applicability of sponsor rules to 

persons who are not sponsors and 
who are engaged in certain unau-
thorized activities. 

(a) The rules of this part that are di-

rected to a sponsor of an FSTD also 
apply to any person who uses or causes 
the use of an FSTD when— 

(1) That person knows that the FSTD 

does not have an FAA-approved spon-
sor; and 

(2) The use of the FSTD by that per-

son is nonetheless claimed for purposes 
of meeting any requirement of this 
chapter or that person knows or should 
have known that the person’s acts or 
omissions would cause another person 
to mistakenly credit use of the FSTD 
for purposes of meeting any require-
ment of this chapter. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00015

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8010

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

§ 60.3 

(b) A situation in which paragraph 

(a) of this section would not apply to a 
person would be when each of the fol-
lowing conditions are met: 

(1) The person sold or leased the 

FSTD and merely represented to the 
purchaser or lessee that the FSTD is in 
a condition in which it should be able 
to obtain FAA approval and qualifica-
tion under this part; 

(2) The person does not falsely claim 

to be the FAA-approved sponsor for the 
FSTD; 

(3) The person does not falsely make 

representations that someone else is 
the FAA-approved sponsor of the FSTD 
at a time when that other person is not 
the FAA-approved sponsor of the 
FSTD; and 

(4) The person’s acts or omissions do 

not cause another person to detrimen-
tally rely on such acts or omissions for 
the mistaken conclusion that the 
FSTD is FAA-approved and qualified 
under this part at the time the FSTD 
is sold or leased. 

§ 60.3

Definitions. 

In addition to the definitions in part 

1 of this chapter, other terms and defi-
nitions applicable to this part are 
found in appendix F of this part. 

§ 60.4

Qualification Performance 

Standards. 

The Qualification Performance 

Standards (QPS) are published in ap-
pendices to this part as follows: 

(a) Appendix A contains the QPS for 

Airplane Flight Simulators. 

(b) Appendix B contains the QPS for 

Airplane Flight Training Devices. 

(c) Appendix C contains the QPS for 

Helicopter Flight Simulators. 

(d) Appendix D contains the QPS for 

Helicopter Flight Training Devices. 

(e) Appendix E contains the QPS for 

Quality Management Systems for 
FSTDs. 

(f) Appendix F contains the QPS for 

Definitions and Abbreviations for 
FSTDs. 

§ 60.5

Quality management system. 

(a) After May 30, 2010, no sponsor 

may use or allow the use of or offer the 
use of an FSTD for flight crewmember 
training or evaluation or for obtaining 
flight experience to meet any require-

ment of this chapter unless the sponsor 
has established and follows a quality 
management system (QMS), currently 
approved by the responsible Flight 
Standards office, for the continuing 
surveillance and analysis of the spon-
sor’s performance and effectiveness in 
providing a satisfactory FSTD for use 
on a regular basis as described in QPS 
appendix E of this part. 

(b) The QMS program must provide a 

process for identifying deficiencies in 
the program and for documenting how 
the program will be changed to address 
these deficiencies. 

(c) Whenever the responsible Flight 

Standards office finds that the QMS 
program does not adequately address 
the procedures necessary to meet the 
requirements of this part, the sponsor 
must, after notification by the respon-
sible Flight Standards office, change 
the program so the procedures meet 
the requirements of this part. Each 
such change must be approved by the 
responsible Flight Standards office 
prior to implementation. 

(d) Within 30 days after the sponsor 

receives a notice described in para-
graph (c) of this section, the sponsor 
may file a petition with the Executive 
Director of Flight Standards Service 
(the Executive Director) for reconsider-
ation of the responsible Flight Stand-
ards office finding. The sponsor must 
address its petition to the Executive 
Director, Flight Standards Service, 
Federal Aviation Administration, 800 
Independence Ave., SW., Washington, 
DC 20591. The filing of such a petition 
to reconsider stays the notice pending 
a decision by the Executive Director. 
However, if the Executive Director 
finds that there is a situation that re-
quires immediate action in the interest 
of safety in air commerce, he may, 
upon a statement of the reasons, re-
quire a change effective without stay. 

[Doc. No. FAA–2002–12461, 71 FR 63426, Oct. 
30, 2006; Amdt. 60–2, 72 FR 59599, Oct. 22, 2007, 
as amended by Docket FAA–2018–0119, Amdt. 
60–5, 83 FR 9170, Mar. 5, 2018; Docket No. 
FAA–2022–1355; Amdt. No. 60–7, 87 FR 75711, 
Dec. 9, 2022] 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00016

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8010

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

§ 60.7 

§ 60.7

Sponsor qualification require-

ments. 

(a) A person is eligible to apply to be 

a sponsor of an FSTD if the following 
conditions are met: 

(1) The person holds, or is an appli-

cant for, a certificate under part 119, 
141, or 142 of this chapter; or holds, or 
is an applicant for, an approved flight 
engineer course in accordance with 
part 63 of this chapter. 

(2) The FSTD will be used, or will be 

offered for use, in the sponsor’s FAA- 
approved flight training program for 
the aircraft being simulated as evi-
denced in a request for evaluation sub-
mitted to the responsible Flight Stand-
ards office. 

(b) A person is a sponsor if the fol-

lowing conditions are met: 

(1) The person is a certificate holder 

under part 119, 141, or 142 of this chap-
ter or has an approved flight engineer 
course in accordance with part 63 of 
this chapter. 

(2) The person has— 
(i) Operations specifications author-

izing the use of the specific aircraft or 
set of aircraft and has an FAA-ap-
proved training program under which 
at least one FSTD, simulating the air-
craft or set of aircraft and for which 
the person is the sponsor, is used by 
the sponsor as described in paragraphs 
(b)(5) or (b)(6) of this section; or 

(ii) Training specifications or an 

FAA-approved course of training under 
which at least one FSTD, simulating 
that aircraft or set of aircraft and for 
which the person is the sponsor, is used 
by the sponsor as described in para-
graphs (b)(5) or (b)(6) of this section. 

(3) The person has a quality manage-

ment system currently approved by the 
responsible Flight Standards office in 
accordance with § 60.5. 

(4) The responsible Flight Standards 

office has accepted the person as the 
sponsor of the FSTD and that accept-
ance has not been withdrawn by the 
FAA. 

(5) At least one FSTD (as referenced 

in paragraph (b)(2)(i) or (b)(2)(ii) of this 
section) that is initially qualified on or 
after May 30, 2008, is used within the 
sponsor’s FAA-approved flight training 
program for the aircraft or set of air-
craft at least once within the 12-month 
period following the initial/upgrade 

evaluation, and at least once within 
each subsequent 12-month period there-
after. 

(6) At least one FSTD (as referenced 

in paragraph (b)(2)(i) or (b)(2)(ii) of this 
section) that was qualified before May 
30, 2008, is used within the sponsor’s 
FAA-approved flight training program 
for the aircraft or set of aircraft at 
least once within the 12-month period 
following the first continuing quali-
fication evaluation conducted by the 
responsible Flight Standards office 
after May 30, 2008 and at least once 
within each subsequent 12-month pe-
riod thereafter. 

(c) If the use requirements of para-

graphs (b)(2) and either (b)(5) or (b)(6) 
of this section are not met, the person 
will forfeit the right to sponsor that 
FSTD and that person will not be eligi-
ble to apply to sponsor that FSTD for 
at least 12 calendar months following 
the expiration of the qualification sta-
tus. 

(d) In addition to the FSTD described 

in paragraph (b) of this section, an 
FSTD sponsor may sponsor any num-
ber of other FSTDs regardless of spe-
cific aircraft or set of aircraft provided 
either— 

(1) During the preceding 12-month pe-

riod, all of the other FSTDs are used 
within the sponsor’s or another certifi-
cate holder’s FAA-approved flight 
training program for the aircraft or set 
of aircraft simulated; or 

(2) The sponsor obtains a written 

statement at least annually from a 
qualified pilot who has flown the air-
craft or set of aircraft (as appropriate) 
during the preceding 12-month period 
stating that the subject FSTD’s per-
formance and handling qualities, with-
in the normal operating envelope, rep-
resent the aircraft or set of aircraft de-
scribed in the FAA Type Certificate 
and the type data sheet, if appropriate. 
The sponsor must retain the two most 
current written statements for review 
by the responsible Flight Standards of-
fice. 

[Doc. No. FAA–2002–12461, 71 FR 63426, Oct. 
30, 2006; Amdt. 60–2, 72 FR 59599, Oct. 22, 2007, 
as amended by Docket No. FAA–2022–1355, 
Amdt. No. 60–7, 87 FR 75711, Dec. 9, 2022] 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00017

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8010

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

§ 60.9 

§ 60.9

Additional responsibilities of the 

sponsor. 

(a) The sponsor must allow the re-

sponsible Flight Standards office upon 
request to inspect the FSTD as soon as 
practicable. This inspection may in-
clude all records and documents relat-
ing to the FSTD, to determine its com-
pliance with this part. 

(b) The sponsor must do the following 

for each FSTD: 

(1) Establish a mechanism to receive 

written comments regarding the FSTD 
and its operation in accordance with 
the QPS appendix E of this part. 

(2) Post in or adjacent to the FSTD 

the Statement of Qualification issued 
by the responsible Flight Standards of-
fice. An electronic copy of the State-
ment of Qualification that may be 
accessed by an appropriate terminal or 
display in or adjacent to the FSTD is 
satisfactory. 

(c) Each sponsor of an FSTD must 

identify to the responsible Flight 
Standards office by name, one indi-
vidual to be the management rep-
resentative (MR). 

(1) One person may serve as an MR 

for more than one FSTD, but one 
FSTD must not have more than one 
person serving in this capacity. 

(2) Each MR must be an employee of 

the sponsor with the responsibility and 
authority to— 

(i) Monitor the on-going qualification 

of assigned FSTDs to ensure that all 
matters regarding FSTD qualification 
are being carried out as provided for in 
this part; 

(ii) Ensure that the QMS is properly 

established, implemented, and main-
tained by overseeing the structure (and 
modifying where necessary) of the QMS 
policies, practices, and procedures; and 

(iii) Regularly brief sponsor’s man-

agement on the status of the on-going 
FSTD qualification program and the 
effectiveness and efficiency of the 
QMS. 

(3) The MR serves as the primary 

contact point for all matters between 
the sponsor and the responsible Flight 
Standards office regarding the quali-
fication of that FSTD as provided for 
in this part. 

(4) The MR may delegate the duties 

described in paragraph (c)(2) and (c)(3) 

of this section to an individual at each 
of the sponsor’s locations. 

[Docket No. FAA–2002–12461, 71 FR 63426, Oct. 
30, 2006, as amended by Docket No. FAA– 
2022–1355, Amdt. No. 60–7, 87 FR 75711, Dec. 9, 
2022] 

§ 60.11

FSTD use. 

No person may use or allow the use 

of or offer the use of an FSTD for flight 
crewmember training or evaluation or 
for obtaining flight experience to meet 
any of the requirements under this 
chapter unless, in accordance with the 
QPS for the specific device, the FSTD 
meets all of the following: 

(a) Has a single sponsor who is quali-

fied under § 60.7. The sponsor may ar-
range with another person for services 
of document preparation and presen-
tation, as well as FSTD inspection, 
maintenance, repair, and servicing; 
however, the sponsor remains respon-
sible for ensuring that these functions 
are conducted in a manner and with a 
result of continually meeting the re-
quirements of this part. 

(b) Is qualified as described in the 

Statement of Qualification. 

(c) Remains qualified, through satis-

factory inspection, continuing quali-
fication evaluations, appropriate main-
tenance, and use requirements in ac-
cordance with this part and the appli-
cable QPS. 

(d) Functions during day-to-day 

training, evaluation, or flight experi-
ence activities with the software and 
hardware that was evaluated as satis-
factory by the responsible Flight 
Standards office and, if modified, modi-
fied only in accordance with the provi-
sions of this part. However, this sec-
tion does not apply to routine software 
or hardware changes that do not fall 
under the requirements of § 60.23. 

(e) Is operated in accordance with the 

provisions and limitations of § 60.25. 

[Docket No. FAA–2002–12461, 71 FR 63426, Oct. 
30, 2006, as amended by Docket No. FAA– 
2022–1355, Amdt. No. 60–7, 87 FR 75711, Dec. 9, 
2022] 

§ 60.13

FSTD objective data require-

ments. 

(a) Except as provided in paragraph 

(b) and (c) of this section, for the pur-
poses of validating FSTD performance 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00018

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8010

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

§ 60.15 

and handling qualities during evalua-
tion for qualification, the data made 
available to the responsible Flight 
Standards office (the validation data 
package) must include the aircraft 
manufacturer’s flight test data and all 
relevant data developed after the type 
certificate was issued (

e.g., data devel-

oped in response to an airworthiness 
directive) if such data results from a 
change in performance, handling quali-
ties, functions, or other characteristics 
of the aircraft that must be considered 
for flight crewmember training, eval-
uation, or for meeting experience re-
quirements of this chapter. 

(b) The validation data package may 

contain flight test data from a source 
in addition to or independent of the 
aircraft manufacturer’s data in support 
of an FSTD qualification, but only if 
this data is gathered and developed by 
that source in accordance with flight 
test methods, including a flight test 
plan, as described in the applicable 
QPS. 

(c) The validation data package may 

also contain predicted data, engineer-
ing simulation data, data from pilot 
owner or pilot operating manuals, or 
data from public domain sources, pro-
vided this data is acceptable to the re-
sponsible Flight Standards office. If 
found acceptable the data may then be 
used in particular applications for 
FSTD qualification. 

(d) Data or other material or ele-

ments must be submitted in a form and 
manner acceptable to the responsible 
Flight Standards office. 

(e) The responsible Flight Standards 

office may require additional objective 
data, which may include flight testing 
if necessary, if the validation data 
package does not support FSTD quali-
fication requirements as described in 
this part and the applicable QPS ap-
pendix. 

(f) When an FSTD sponsor learns, or 

is advised by an aircraft manufacturer 
or other data provider, that an addi-
tion to, an amendment to, or a revision 
of data that may relate to FSTD per-
formance or handling characteristics is 
available, the sponsor must notify the 

responsible Flight Standards office as 
described in the applicable QPS. 

[Docket No. FAA–2002–12461, 71 FR 63426, Oct. 
30, 2006, as amended by Docket No. FAA– 
2022–1355, Amdt. No. 60–7, 87 FR 75711, Dec. 9, 
2022] 

§ 60.14

Special equipment and per-

sonnel requirements for qualifica-
tion of the FSTD. 

When notified by the responsible 

Flight Standards office, the sponsor 
must make available all special equip-
ment and qualified personnel needed to 
accomplish or assist in the accomplish-
ment of tests during initial qualifica-
tion, continuing qualification, or spe-
cial evaluations. 

[Docket No. FAA–2002–12461, 71 FR 63426, Oct. 
30, 2006, as amended by Docket No. FAA– 
2022–1355, Amdt. No. 60–7, 87 FR 75711, Dec. 9, 
2022] 

§ 60.15

Initial qualification require-

ments. 

(a) For each FSTD, the sponsor must 

submit a request to the responsible 
Flight Standards office to evaluate the 
FSTD for initial qualification at a spe-
cific level and simultaneously request 
the Training Program Approval Au-
thority (TPAA) forward a concurring 
letter to the responsible Flight Stand-
ards office. The request must be sub-
mitted in the form and manner de-
scribed in the applicable QPS. 

(b) The management representative 

described in § 60.9(c) must sign a state-
ment (electronic signature is accept-
able for electronic transmissions) after 
confirming the following: 

(1) The performance and handling 

qualities of the FSTD represent those 
of the aircraft or set of aircraft within 
the normal operating envelope. This 
determination must be made by a 
pilot(s) meeting the requirements of 
paragraph (d) of this section after hav-
ing flown all of the Operations Tasks 
listed in the applicable QPS appendix 
relevant to the qualification level of 
the FSTD. Exceptions, if any, must be 
noted. The name of the person(s) mak-
ing this determination must be avail-
able to the responsible Flight Stand-
ards office upon request. 

(2) The FSTD systems and sub-sys-

tems (including the simulated aircraft 
systems) functionally represent those 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00019

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8010

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

10 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

§ 60.15 

in the aircraft or set of aircraft. This 
determination must be made by the 
pilot(s) described in paragraph (b)(1) of 
this section, or by a person(s) trained 
on simulator systems/sub-systems and 
trained on the operation of the simu-
lated aircraft systems, after having ex-
ercised the operation of the FSTD and 
the pertinent functions available 
through the Instructor Operating Sta-
tion(s). Exceptions, if any, must be 
noted. The name of the person(s) mak-
ing this determination must be avail-
able to the responsible Flight Stand-
ards office upon request. 

(3) The cockpit represents the con-

figuration of the specific type; or air-
craft make, model, and series aircraft 
being simulated, as appropriate. This 
determination must be made by the 
pilot(s) described in paragraph (b)(1) of 
this section, or by a person(s) trained 
on the configuration and operation of 
the aircraft simulated. Exceptions, if 
any, must be noted. The name of the 
person(s) making this determination 
must be available to the responsible 
Flight Standards office upon request. 

(c) Except for those FSTDs pre-

viously qualified and described in 
§ 60.17, each FSTD evaluated for initial 
qualification must meet the standard 
that is in effect at the time of the eval-
uation. However— 

(1) If the FAA publishes a change to 

the existing standard or publishes a 
new standard for the evaluation for ini-
tial qualification, a sponsor may re-
quest that the responsible Flight 
Standards office apply the standard 
that was in effect when an FSTD was 
ordered for delivery if the sponsor— 

(i) Within 30 days of the publication 

of the change to the existing standard 
or publication of the new standard, no-
tifies the responsible Flight Standards 
office that an FSTD has been ordered; 

(ii) Within 90 days of the responsible 

Flight Standards office notification de-
scribed in paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this 
section, requests that the standard in 
effect at the time the order was placed 
be used for the evaluation for initial 
qualification; and 

(iii) The evaluation is conducted 

within 24 months following the publica-
tion of the change to the existing 
standard or publication of the new 
standard. 

(2) This notification must include a 

description of the FSTD; the antici-
pated qualification level of the FSTD; 
the make, model, and series of aircraft 
simulated; and any other pertinent in-
formation. 

(3) Any tests, tolerances, or other re-

quirements that are current at the 
time of the evaluation may be used 
during the initial evaluation, at the re-
quest of the sponsor, if the sponsor pro-
vides acceptable updates to the re-
quired qualification test guide. 

(4) The standards used for the evalua-

tion for initial qualification will be 
used for all subsequent evaluations of 
the FSTD. 

(5) An FSTD sponsor or FSTD manu-

facturer may submit a request to the 
Administrator for approval of a devi-
ation from the QPS requirements as 
defined in Appendix A through Appen-
dix D of this part. 

(i) Requests for deviation must be 

submitted in a form and manner ac-
ceptable to the Administrator and 
must provide sufficient justification 
that the deviation meets or exceeds the 
testing requirements and tolerances as 
specified in the part 60 QPS or will oth-
erwise not adversely affect the fidelity 
and capability of the FSTDs evaluated 
and qualified under the deviation. 

(ii) The Administrator may consider 

deviation from the minimum require-
ments tables, the objective testing ta-
bles, the functions and subjective test-
ing tables, and other supporting tables 
and requirements in the part 60 QPS. 

(iii) Deviations may be issued to an 

FSTD manufacturer for the initial 
qualification of multiple FSTDs, sub-
ject to terms and limitations as deter-
mined by Administrator. Approved de-
viations will become a part of the per-
manent qualification basis of the indi-
vidual FSTD and will be noted in the 
FSTD’s Statement of Qualification. 

(iv) If the FAA publishes a change to 

the existing part 60 standards as de-
scribed in paragraph (c)(1) of this sec-
tion or issues an FSTD Directive as de-
scribed in § 60.23(b), which conflicts 
with or supersedes an approved devi-
ation, the Administrator may termi-
nate or revise a grant of deviation au-
thority issued under this paragraph. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00020

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8010

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

11 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

§ 60.16 

(d) The pilot(s) who contributes to 

the confirmation statement required 
by paragraph (b) of this section must— 

(1) Be designated by the sponsor; and 
(2) Be qualified in— 
(i) The aircraft or set of aircraft 

being simulated; or 

(ii) For aircraft not yet issued a type 

certificate, or aircraft not previously 
operated by the sponsor or not having 
previous FAA-approved training pro-
grams conducted by the sponsor, an 
aircraft similar in size and configura-
tion. 

(e) The subjective tests that form the 

basis for the statements described in 
paragraph (b) of this section and the 
objective tests referenced in paragraph 
(f) of this section must be accom-
plished at the sponsor’s training facil-
ity or other sponsor designated loca-
tion where training will take place, ex-
cept as provided for in the applicable 
QPS. 

(f) The person seeking to qualify the 

FSTD must provide the responsible 
Flight Standards office access to the 
FSTD for the length of time necessary 
for the responsible Flight Standards of-
fice to complete the required evalua-
tion of the FSTD for initial qualifica-
tion, which includes the conduct and 
evaluation of objective and subjective 
tests, including general FSTD require-
ments, as described in the applicable 
QPS, to determine that the FSTD 
meets the standards in that QPS. 

(g) When the FSTD passes an evalua-

tion for initial qualification, the re-
sponsible Flight Standards office issues 
a Statement of Qualification that in-
cludes all of the following: 

(1) Identification of the sponsor. 
(2) Identification of the make, model, 

and series of the aircraft or set of air-
craft being simulated. 

(3) Identification of the configuration 

of the aircraft or set of aircraft being 
simulated (

e.g., engine model or mod-

els, flight instruments, or navigation 
or other systems). 

(4) A statement that the FSTD is 

qualified as either a full flight simu-
lator or a flight training device. 

(5) Identification of the qualification 

level of the FSTD. 

(6) A statement that (with the excep-

tion of the noted exclusions for which 
the FSTD has not been subjectively 

tested by the sponsor or the respon-
sible Flight Standards office and for 
which qualification is not sought) the 
qualification of the FSTD includes the 
tasks set out in the applicable QPS ap-
pendix relevant to the qualification 
level of the FSTD. 

(7) A statement referencing any devi-

ations that have been granted and in-
cluded in the permanent qualification 
basis of the FSTD. 

(h) After the responsible Flight 

Standards office completes the evalua-
tion for initial qualification, the spon-
sor must update the Qualification Test 
Guide (QTG), with the results of the 
FAA-witnessed tests together with the 
results of all the objective tests de-
scribed in the applicable QPS. 

(i) Upon issuance of the Statement of 

Qualification the updated QTG be-
comes the Master Qualification Test 
Guide (MQTG). The MQTG must be 
made available to the responsible 
Flight Standards office upon request. 

[Docket No. FAA–2002–12461, 71 FR 63426, Oct. 
30, 2006, as amended by Docket FAA–2014– 
0391, Amdt. 60–4, 81 FR 18217, Mar. 30, 2016; 
Docket No. FAA–2022–1355, Amdt. No. 60–7, 87 
FR 75711, Dec. 9, 2022] 

§ 60.16

Additional qualifications for a 

currently qualified FSTD. 

(a) A currently qualified FSTD is re-

quired to undergo an additional quali-
fication process if a user intends to use 
the FSTD for meeting training, evalua-
tion, or flight experience requirements 
of this chapter beyond the qualifica-
tion issued for that FSTD. This process 
consists of the following: 

(1) The sponsor: 
(i) Must submit to the responsible 

Flight Standards office all modifica-
tions to the MQTG that are required to 
support the additional qualification. 

(ii) Must describe to the responsible 

Flight Standards office all modifica-
tions to the FSTD that are required to 
support the additional qualification. 

(iii) Must submit to the responsible 

Flight Standards office a confirmation 
statement as described in § 60.15(c) that 
a pilot, designated by the sponsor in 
accordance with § 60.15(d), has subjec-
tively evaluated the FSTD in those 
areas not previously evaluated. 

(2) The FSTD must successfully pass 

an evaluation— 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00021

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8010

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

12 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

§ 60.17 

(i) Consisting of all the elements of 

an initial evaluation for qualification 
in those circumstances where the re-
sponsible Flight Standards office has 
determined that all the elements of an 
initial evaluation for qualification is 
necessary; or 

(ii) Consisting of those elements of 

an initial evaluation for qualification 
designated as necessary by the respon-
sible Flight Standards office. 

(b) In making the determinations de-

scribed in paragraph (a)(2) of this sec-
tion, the responsible Flight Standards 
office considers factors including the 
existing qualification of the FSTD, any 
modifications to the FSTD hardware or 
software that are involved, and any ad-
ditions or modifications to the MQTG. 

(c) The FSTD is qualified for the ad-

ditional uses when the responsible 
Flight Standards office issues an 
amended Statement of Qualification in 
accordance with § 60.15(h). 

(d) The sponsor may not modify the 

FSTD except as described in § 60.23. 

[Docket No. FAA–2002–12461, 71 FR 63426, Oct. 
30, 2006, as amended by Docket No. FAA– 
2022–1355, Amdt. No. 60–7, 87 FR 75711, Dec. 9, 
2022] 

§ 60.17

Previously qualified FSTDs. 

(a) Unless otherwise specified by an 

FSTD Directive, further referenced in 
the applicable QPS, or as specified in 
paragraph (e) of this section, an FSTD 
qualified before May 31, 2016 will retain 
its qualification basis as long as it con-
tinues to meet the standards, including 
the objective test results recorded in 
the MQTG and subjective tests, under 
which it was originally evaluated, re-
gardless of sponsor. The sponsor of 
such an FSTD must comply with the 
other applicable provisions of this part. 

(b) For each FSTD qualified before 

May 30, 2008, no sponsor may use or 
allow the use of or offer the use of such 
an FSTD after May 30, 2014 for flight 
crewmember training, evaluation or 
flight experience to meet any of the re-
quirements of this chapter, unless that 
FSTD has been issued a Statement of 
Qualification, including the Configura-
tion List and the List of Qualified 
Tasks in accordance with the proce-
dures set out in the applicable QPS. 

(c) If the FSTD qualification is lost 

under § 60.27 and— 

(i) Restored under § 60.27 in less than 

(2) years, then the qualification basis 
(in terms of objective tests and subjec-
tive tests) for the re-qualification will 
be those against which the FSTD was 
originally evaluated and qualified. 

(ii) Not restored under § 60.27 for two 

(2) years or more, then the qualifica-
tion basis (in terms of objective tests 
and subjective tests) for the re-quali-
fication will be those standards in ef-
fect and current at the time of re-qual-
ification application. 

(d) Except as provided in paragraph 

(e) of this section, any change in FSTD 
qualification level initiated on or after 
May 30, 2008 requires an evaluation for 
initial qualification in accordance with 
this part. 

(e) A sponsor may request that an 

FSTD be permanently downgraded. In 
such a case, the responsible Flight 
Standards office may downgrade a 
qualified FSTD without requiring and 
without conducting an initial evalua-
tion for the new qualification level. 
Subsequent continuing qualification 
evaluations will use the existing 
MQTG, modified as necessary to reflect 
the new qualification level. 

(f) When the sponsor has appropriate 

validation data available and receives 
approval from the responsible Flight 
Standards office, the sponsor may 
adopt tests and associated tolerances 
described in the current qualification 
standards as the tests and tolerances 
applicable for the continuing qualifica-
tion of a previously qualified FSTD. 
The updated test(s) and tolerance(s) 
must be made a permanent part of the 
MQTG. 

[Doc. No. FAA–2002–12461, 71 FR 63426, Oct. 
30, 2006; Amdt. 60–2, 72 FR 59599, Oct. 22, 2007, 
as amended by Docket FAA–2014–0391, Amdt. 
60–4, 81 FR 18218, Mar. 30, 2016; Docket No. 
FAA–2022–1355, Amdt. No. 60–7, 87 FR 75711, 
Dec. 9, 2022] 

§ 60.19

Inspection, continuing quali-

fication evaluation, and mainte-
nance requirements. 

(a) 

Inspection.  No sponsor may use or 

allow the use of or offer the use of an 
FSTD for flight crewmember training, 
evaluation, or flight experience to 
meet any of the requirements of this 
chapter unless the sponsor does the fol-
lowing: 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00022

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8010

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

13 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

§ 60.21 

(1) Accomplishes all appropriate ob-

jective tests each year as specified in 
the applicable QPS. 

(2) Completes a functional preflight 

check within the preceding 24 hours. 

(b) 

Continuing qualification evaluation. 

(1) This evaluation consists of objec-
tive tests, and subjective tests, includ-
ing general FSTD requirements, as de-
scribed in the applicable QPS or as 
may be amended by an FSTD Direc-
tive. 

(2) The sponsor must contact the re-

sponsible Flight Standards office to 
schedule the FSTD for continuing qual-
ification evaluations not later than 60 
days before the evaluation is due. 

(3) The sponsor must provide the re-

sponsible Flight Standards office re-
sponsible Flight Standards office ac-
cess to the objective test results in the 
MQTG and access to the FSTD for the 
length of time necessary for the re-
sponsible Flight Standards office to 
complete the required continuing qual-
ification evaluations. 

(4) The frequency of the responsible 

Flight Standards office-conducted con-
tinuing qualification evaluations for 
each FSTD will be established by the 
responsible Flight Standards office and 
specified in the Statement of Qualifica-
tion. 

(5) Continuing qualification evalua-

tions conducted in the 3 calendar 
months before or after the calendar 
month in which these continuing quali-
fication evaluations are required will 
be considered to have been conducted 
in the calendar month in which they 
were required. 

(6) No sponsor may use or allow the 

use of or offer the use of an FSTD for 
flight crewmember training or evalua-
tion or for obtaining flight experience 
for the flight crewmember to meet any 
requirement of this chapter unless the 
FSTD has passed a responsible Flight 
Standards office-conducted continuing 
qualification evaluation within the 
time frame specified in the Statement 
of Qualification or within the grace pe-
riod as described in paragraph (b)(5) of 
this section. 

(c) 

Maintenance.  The sponsor is re-

sponsible for continuing corrective and 
preventive maintenance on the FSTD 
to ensure that it continues to meet the 
requirements of this part and the appli-

cable QPS appendix. No sponsor may 
use or allow the use of or offer the use 
of an FSTD for flight crewmember 
training, evaluation, or flight experi-
ence to meet any of the requirements 
of this chapter unless the sponsor does 
the following: 

(1) Maintains a discrepancy log. 
(2) Ensures that, when a discrepancy 

is discovered, the following require-
ments are met: 

(i) A description of each discrepancy 

is entered in the log and remains in the 
log until the discrepancy is corrected 
as specified in § 60.25(b). 

(ii) A description of the corrective 

action taken for each discrepancy, the 
identity of the individual taking the 
action, and the date that action is 
taken is entered in the log. 

(iii) The discrepancy log is kept in a 

form and manner acceptable to the Ad-
ministrator and is kept in or adjacent 
to the FSTD. An electronic log that 
may be accessed by an appropriate ter-
minal or display in or adjacent to the 
FSTD is satisfactory. 

[Docket No. FAA–2002–12461, 71 FR 63426, Oct. 
30, 2006, as amended by Docket FAA–2014– 
0391, Amdt. 60–4, 81 FR 18218, Mar. 30, 2016; 
Docket No. FAA–2022–1355, Amdt. No. 60–7, 87 
FR 75711, Dec. 9, 2022] 

§ 60.20

Logging FSTD discrepancies. 

Each instructor, check airman, or 

representative of the Administrator 
conducting training, evaluation, or 
flight experience, and each person con-
ducting the preflight inspection who 
discovers a discrepancy, including any 
missing, malfunctioning, or inoper-
ative components in the FSTD, must 
write or cause to be written a descrip-
tion of that discrepancy into the dis-
crepancy log at the end of the FSTD 
preflight or FSTD use session. 

§ 60.21

Interim qualification of FSTDs 

for new aircraft types or models. 

(a) A sponsor may apply for and the 

responsible Flight Standards office 
may issue an interim qualification 
level for an FSTD for a new type or 
model of aircraft, even though the air-
craft manufacturer’s aircraft data 
package is preliminary, if the sponsor 
provides the following to the satisfac-
tion of the responsible Flight Stand-
ards office— 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00023

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8010

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

14 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

§ 60.23 

(1) The aircraft manufacturer’s data, 

which consists of at least predicted 
data, validated by a limited set of 
flight test data; 

(2) The aircraft manufacturer’s de-

scription of the prediction method-
ology used to develop the predicted 
data; and 

(3) The QTG test results. 
(b) An FSTD that has been issued in-

terim qualification is deemed to have 
been issued initial qualification unless 
the responsible Flight Standards office 
rescinds the qualification. Interim 
qualification terminates two years 
after its issuance, unless the respon-
sible Flight Standards office deter-
mines that specific conditions warrant 
otherwise. 

(c) Within twelve months of the re-

lease of the final aircraft data package 
by the aircraft manufacturer, but no 
later than two years after the issuance 
of the interim qualification status, the 
sponsor must apply for initial quali-
fication in accordance with § 60.15 based 
on the final aircraft data package ap-
proved by the aircraft manufacturer, 
unless the responsible Flight Standards 
office determines that specific condi-
tions warrant otherwise. 

(d) An FSTD with interim qualifica-

tion may be modified only in accord-
ance with § 60.23. 

[Docket No. FAA–2002–12461, 71 FR 63426, Oct. 
30, 2006, as amended by Docket No. FAA– 
2022–1355, Amdt. No. 60–7, 87 FR 75711, Dec. 9, 
2022] 

§ 60.23

Modifications to FSTDs. 

(a) 

Description of a modification. For 

the purposes of this part, an FSTD is 
said to have been modified when: 

(1) Equipment or devices intended to 

simulate aircraft appliances are added 
to or removed from FSTD, which 
change the Statement of Qualification 
or the MQTG; or 

(2) Changes are made to either soft-

ware or hardware that are intended to 
impact flight or ground dynamics; 
changes are made that impact perform-
ance or handling characteristics of the 
FSTD (including motion, visual, con-
trol loading, or sound systems for 
those FSTD levels requiring sound 
tests and measurements); or changes 
are made to the MQTG. Changes to the 
MQTG which do not affect required ob-

jective testing results or validation 
data approved during the initial eval-
uation of the FSTD are not considered 
modifications under this section. 

(b) 

FSTD Directive. When the FAA de-

termines that FSTD modification is 
necessary for safety of flight reasons, 
the sponsor of each affected FSTD 
must ensure that the FSTD is modified 
according to the FSTD Directive re-
gardless of the original qualification 
standards applicable to any specific 
FSTD. 

(c) 

Using the modified FSTD. The spon-

sor may not use, or allow the use of, or 
offer the use of, the FSTD with the 
proposed modification for flight crew-
member training or evaluation or for 
obtaining flight experience for the 
flight crewmember to meet any re-
quirement of this chapter unless: 

(1) The sponsor has notified the re-

sponsible Flight Standards office and 
the TPAA of their intent to incor-
porate the proposed modification, and 
one of the following has occurred; 

(i) Twenty-one days have passed 

since the sponsor notified the respon-
sible Flight Standards office and the 
TPAA of the proposed modification and 
the sponsor has not received any re-
sponse from either the responsible 
Flight Standards office or the TPAA; 

(ii) Twenty-one days have passed 

since the sponsor notified the respon-
sible Flight Standards office and the 
TPAA of the proposed modification and 
one has approved the proposed modi-
fication and the other has not re-
sponded; 

(iii) Fewer than twenty-one days 

have passed since the sponsor notified 
the responsible Flight Standards office 
and the TPAA of the proposed modi-
fication and the responsible Flight 
Standards office and TPAA both ap-
prove the proposed modification; 

(iv) The sponsor has successfully 

completed any evaluation the respon-
sible Flight Standards office may re-
quire in accordance with the standards 
for an evaluation for initial qualifica-
tion or any part thereof before the 
modified FSTD is placed in service. 

(2) The notification is submitted with 

the content as, and in a form and man-
ner as, specified in the applicable QPS. 

(d) 

User notification. When a modifica-

tion is made to an FSTD that affects 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00024

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8010

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

15 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

§ 60.27 

the Statement of Qualification, the 
sponsor must post an addendum to the 
Statement of Qualification until such 
time as a permanent, updated state-
ment is posted. 

(e) 

MQTG update. The MQTG must be 

updated with current objective test re-
sults in accordance with § 60.15(h) and 
(i) and appropriate objective data in 
accordance with § 60.13, each time an 
FSTD is modified and an objective test 
or other MQTG section is affected by 
the modification. If an FSTD Directive 
is the cause of this update, the direc-
tion to make the modification and the 
record of the modification completion 
must be filed in the MQTG. 

[Docket No. FAA–2002–12461, 71 FR 63426, Oct. 
30, 2006, as amended by Docket FAA–2014– 
0391, Amdt. 60–4, 81 FR 18218, Mar. 30, 2016; 
Docket No. FAA–2022–1355, Amdt. No. 60–7, 87 
FR 75711, Dec. 9, 2022] 

§ 60.25

Operation with missing, mal-

functioning, or inoperative compo-
nents. 

(a) No person may knowingly use or 

allow the use of or misrepresent the ca-
pability of an FSTD for any maneuver, 
procedure, or task that is to be accom-
plished to meet training, evaluation, or 
flight experience requirements of this 
chapter for flight crewmember certifi-
cation or qualification when there is a 
missing, malfunctioning, or inoper-
ative (MMI) component that is re-
quired to be present and correctly oper-
ate for the satisfactory completion of 
that maneuver, procedure, or task. 

(b) Each MMI component as de-

scribed in paragraph (a) of this section, 
or any MMI component installed and 
required to operate correctly to meet 
the current Statement of Qualification, 
must be repaired or replaced within 30 
calendar days, unless otherwise re-
quired or authorized by the responsible 
Flight Standards office. 

(c) A list of the current MMI compo-

nents must be readily available in or 
adjacent to the FSTD for review by 
users of the device. Electronic access 
to this list via an appropriate terminal 
or display in or adjacent to the FSTD 
is satisfactory. The discrepancy log 
may be used to satisfy this require-
ment provided each currently MMI 

component is listed in the discrepancy 
log. 

[Docket No. FAA–2002–12461, 71 FR 63426, Oct. 
30, 2006, as amended by Docket No. FAA– 
2022–1355, Amdt. No. 60–7, 87 FR 75711, Dec. 9, 
2022] 

§ 60.27

Automatic loss of qualification 

and procedures for restoration of 
qualification. 

(a) An FSTD qualification is auto-

matically lost when any of the fol-
lowing occurs: 

(1) The FSTD is not used in the spon-

sor’s FAA-approved flight training pro-
gram in accordance with § 60.7(b)(5) or 
(b)(6) and the sponsor does not obtain 
and maintain the written statement as 
described in § 60.7(d)(2). 

(2) The FSTD is not inspected in ac-

cordance with § 60.19. 

(3) The FSTD is physically moved 

from one location and installed in a 
different location, regardless of dis-
tance. 

(4) The MQTG is missing or otherwise 

not available and a replacement is not 
made within 30 days. 

(b) If FSTD qualification is lost 

under paragraph (a) of this section, 
qualification is restored when either of 
the following provisions is met: 

(1) The FSTD successfully passes an 

evaluation: 

(i) For initial qualification, in ac-

cordance with §§ 60.15 and 60.17(c) in 
those circumstances where the respon-
sible Flight Standards office has deter-
mined that a full evaluation for initial 
qualification is necessary; or 

(ii) For those elements of an evalua-

tion for initial qualification, in accord-
ance with §§ 60.15 and 60.17(c), as deter-
mined to be necessary by the respon-
sible Flight Standards office. 

(2) The responsible Flight Standards 

office advises the sponsor that an eval-
uation is not necessary. 

(c) In making the determinations de-

scribed in paragraph (b) of this section, 
the responsible Flight Standards office 
considers factors including the number 
of continuing qualification evaluations 
missed, the number of sponsor-con-
ducted quarterly inspections missed, 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00025

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8010

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

16 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

§ 60.29 

and the care that had been taken of the 
device since the last evaluation. 

[Docket No. FAA–2002–12461, 71 FR 63426, Oct. 
30, 2006, as amended by Docket No. FAA– 
2022–1355, Amdt. No. 60–7, 87 FR 75711, Dec. 9, 
2022] 

§ 60.29

Other losses of qualification 

and procedures for restoration of 
qualification. 

(a) Except as provided in paragraph 

(c) of this section, when the responsible 
Flight Standards office determines 
that the FSTD no longer meets quali-
fication standards, the following proce-
dure applies: 

(1) The responsible Flight Standards 

office notifies the sponsor in writing 
that the FSTD no longer meets some 
or all of its qualification standards. 

(2) The responsible Flight Standards 

office sets a reasonable period (but not 
less than 7 days) within which the 
sponsor may submit written informa-
tion, views, and arguments on the 
FSTD qualification. 

(3) After considering all material pre-

sented, the responsible Flight Stand-
ards office notifies the sponsor about 
the determination with regard to the 
qualification of the FSTD. 

(4) When the responsible Flight 

Standards office notifies the sponsor 
that some or all of the FSTD is no 
longer qualified, the action described 
in the notification becomes effective 
not less than 30 days after the sponsor 
receives that notice unless— 

(i) The responsible Flight Standards 

office finds under paragraph (c) of this 
section that there is an emergency re-
quiring immediate action with respect 
to safety in air commerce; or 

(ii) The sponsor petitions the Execu-

tive Director of Flight Standards Serv-
ice for reconsideration of the respon-
sible Flight Standards office finding 
under paragraph (b) of this section. 

(b) When a sponsor seeks reconsider-

ation of a decision from the responsible 
Flight Standards office concerning the 
FSTD qualification, the following pro-
cedure applies: 

(1) The sponsor must petition for re-

consideration of that decision within 30 
days of the date that the sponsor re-
ceives a notice that some or all of the 
FSTD is no longer qualified. 

(2) The sponsor must address its peti-

tion to the Executive Director, Flight 
Standards Service, Federal Aviation 
Administration, 800 Independence Ave., 
SW., Washington, DC 20591. 

(3) A petition for reconsideration, if 

filed within the 30-day period, suspends 
the effectiveness of the determination 
by the responsible Flight Standards of-
fice that the FSTD is no longer quali-
fied unless the responsible Flight 
Standards office has found, under para-
graph (c) of this section, that an emer-
gency exists requiring immediate ac-
tion with respect to safety in air com-
merce. 

(c) If the responsible Flight Stand-

ards office find that an emergency ex-
ists requiring immediate action with 
respect to safety in air commerce that 
makes the procedures set out in this 
section impracticable or contrary to 
the public interest: 

(1) The responsible Flight Standards 

office withdraws qualification of some 
or all of the FSTD and makes the with-
drawal of qualification effective on the 
day the sponsor receives notice of it. 

(2) In the notice to the sponsor, the 

responsible Flight Standards office ar-
ticulates the reasons for its finding 
that an emergency exists requiring im-
mediate action with respect to safety 
in air transportation or air commerce 
or that makes it impracticable or con-
trary to the public interest to stay the 
effectiveness of the finding. 

(d) FSTD qualification lost under 

paragraph (a) or (c) of this section may 
be restored when either of the fol-
lowing provisions are met: 

(1) The FSTD successfully passes an 

evaluation for initial qualification, in 
accordance with §§ 60.15 and 60.17(c) in 
those circumstances where the respon-
sible Flight Standards office has deter-
mined that a full evaluation for initial 
qualification is necessary; or 

(2) The FSTD successfully passes an 

evaluation for those elements of an ini-
tial qualification evaluation, in accord-
ance with §§ 60.15 and 60.17(c), as deter-
mined to be necessary by the respon-
sible Flight Standards office. 

(e) In making the determinations de-

scribed in paragraph (d) of this section, 
the responsible Flight Standards office 
considers factors including the reason 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00026

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8010

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

17 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

§ 60.33 

for the loss of qualification, any re-
pairs or replacements that may have to 
have been completed, the number of 
continuing qualification evaluations 
missed, the number of sponsor-con-
ducted quarterly inspections missed, 
and the care that had been taken of the 
device since the loss of qualification. 

[Docket No. FAA–2002–12461, 71 FR 63426, Oct. 
30, 2006, as amended by Docket FAA–2018– 
0119, Amdt. 60–5, 83 FR 9170, Mar. 5, 2018; 
Docket No. FAA–2022–1355, Amdt. No. 60–7, 87 
FR 75711, Dec. 9, 2022] 

§ 60.31

Recordkeeping and reporting. 

(a) The FSTD sponsor must maintain 

the following records for each FSTD it 
sponsors: 

(1) The MQTG and each amendment 

thereto. 

(2) A record of all FSTD modifica-

tions affected under § 60.23 since the 
issuance of the original Statement of 
Qualification. 

(3) A copy of all of the following: 
(i) Results of the qualification eval-

uations (initial and each upgrade) since 
the issuance of the original Statement 
of Qualification. 

(ii) Results of the objective tests con-

ducted in accordance with § 60.19(a) for 
a period of 2 years. 

(iii) Results of the previous three 

continuing qualification evaluations, 
or the continuing qualification evalua-
tions from the previous 2 years, which-
ever covers a longer period. 

(iv) Comments obtained in accord-

ance with § 60.9(b) for a period of at 
least 90 days. 

(4) A record of all discrepancies en-

tered in the discrepancy log over the 
previous 2 years, including the fol-
lowing: 

(i) A list of the components or equip-

ment that were or are missing, mal-
functioning, or inoperative. 

(ii) The action taken to correct the 

discrepancy. 

(iii) The date the corrective action 

was taken. 

(iv) The identity of the person deter-

mining that the discrepancy has been 
corrected. 

(b) The records specified in this sec-

tion must be maintained in plain lan-
guage form or in coded form if the 
coded form provides for the preserva-
tion and retrieval of information in a 

manner acceptable to the responsible 
Flight Standards office. 

[Docket No. FAA–2002–12461, 71 FR 63426, Oct. 
30, 2006, as amended by Docket No. FAA– 
2022–1355, Amdt. No. 60–7, 87 FR 75711, Dec. 9, 
2022] 

§ 60.33

Applications, logbooks, reports, 

and records: Fraud, falsification, or 
incorrect statements. 

(a) No person may make, or cause to 

be made, any of the following: 

(1) A fraudulent or intentionally false 

statement in any application or any 
amendment thereto, or any other re-
port or test result required by this 
part. 

(2) A fraudulent or intentionally false 

statement in or a known omission from 
any record or report that is kept, 
made, or used to show compliance with 
this part, or to exercise any privileges 
under this chapter. 

(3) Any reproduction or alteration, 

for fraudulent purpose, of any report, 
record, or test result required under 
this part. 

(b) The commission by any person of 

any act prohibited under paragraph (a) 
of this section is a basis for any one or 
any combination of the following: 

(1) A civil penalty. 
(2) Suspension or revocation of any 

certificate held by that person that 
was issued under this chapter. 

(3) The removal of FSTD qualifica-

tion and approval for use in a training 
program. 

(c) The following may serve as a basis 

for removal of qualification of an 
FSTD including the withdrawal of ap-
proval for use of an FSTD; or denying 
an application for a qualification: 

(1) An incorrect statement, upon 

which the FAA relied or could have re-
lied, made in support of an application 
for a qualification or a request for ap-
proval for use. 

(2) An incorrect entry, upon which 

the FAA relied or could have relied, 
made in any logbook, record, or report 
that is kept, made, or used to show 
compliance with any requirement for 
an FSTD qualification or an approval 
for use. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00027

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8010

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

18 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

§ 60.35 

§ 60.35

Specific full flight simulator 

compliance requirements. 

(a) No device will be eligible for ini-

tial or upgrade qualification to a FFS 
at Level C or Level D under this part 
unless it includes the equipment and 
appliances installed and operating to 
the extent necessary for the issuance of 
an airman certificate or rating. 

(b) No device will be eligible for ini-

tial or upgrade qualification to a FFS 
at Level A or Level B under this part 
unless it includes the equipment and 
appliances installed and operating to 
the extent necessary for the training, 
testing, and/or checking that comprise 
the simulation portion of the require-
ments for issuance of an airman cer-
tificate or rating. 

§ 60.37

FSTD qualification on the basis 

of a Bilateral Aviation Safety Agree-
ment (BASA). 

(a) The evaluation and qualification 

of an FSTD by a contracting State to 
the Convention on International Civil 
Aviation for the sponsor of an FSTD 
located in that contracting State may 
be used as the basis for issuing a U.S. 
statement of qualification (see applica-
ble QPS, attachment 4, figure 4) by the 
responsible Flight Standards office to 
the sponsor of that FSTD in accord-
ance with— 

(1) A BASA between the United 

States and the Contracting State that 
issued the original qualification; and 

(2) A Simulator Implementation Pro-

cedure (SIP) established under the 
BASA. 

(b) The SIP must contain any condi-

tions and limitations on validation and 
issuance of such qualification by the 
U.S. 

[Docket No. FAA–2002–12461, 71 FR 63426, Oct. 
30, 2006, as amended by Docket No. FAA– 
2022–1355, Amdt. No. 60–7, 87 FR 75711, Dec. 9, 
2022] 

A

PPENDIX

TO

P

ART

60—Q

UALIFICATION

 

P

ERFORMANCE

S

TANDARDS FOR

A

IR

-

PLANE

F

ULL

F

LIGHT

S

IMULATORS

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

This appendix establishes the standards for 

Airplane FFS evaluation and qualification. 
The Flight Standards Service is responsible 
for the development, application, and imple-

mentation of the standards contained within 
this appendix. The procedures and criteria 
specified in this appendix will be used by the 
responsible Flight Standards office, when 
conducting airplane FFS evaluations. 

T

ABLE OF

C

ONTENTS

 

1. Introduction. 
2. Applicability (§§ 60.1 and 60.2). 
3. Definitions (§ 60.3). 
4. Qualification Performance Standards 

(§ 60.4). 

5. Quality Management System (§ 60.5). 
6. Sponsor Qualification Requirements 

(§ 60.7). 

7. Additional Responsibilities of the Sponsor 

(§ 60.9). 

8. FFS Use (§ 60.11). 
9. FFS Objective Data Requirements (§ 60.13). 
10. Special Equipment and Personnel Re-

quirements for Qualification of the FFS 
(§ 60.14). 

11. Initial (and Upgrade) Qualification Re-

quirements (§ 60.15). 

12. Additional Qualifications for a Currently 

Qualified FFS (§ 60.16). 

13. Previously Qualified FFSs (§ 60.17). 
14. Inspection, Continuing Qualification 

Evaluation, and Maintenance Require-
ments (§ 60.19). 

15. Logging FFS Discrepancies (§ 60.20). 
16. Interim Qualification of FFSs for New 

Airplane Types or Models (§ 60.21). 

17. Modifications to FFSs (§ 60.23). 
18. Operations With Missing, Malfunctioning, 

or Inoperative Components (§ 60.25). 

19. Automatic Loss of Qualification and Pro-

cedures for Restoration of Qualification 
(§ 60.27). 

20. Other Losses of Qualification and Proce-

dures for Restoration of Qualification 
(§ 60.29). 

21. Record Keeping and Reporting (§ 60.31). 
22. Applications, Logbooks, Reports, and 

Records: Fraud, Falsification, or Incor-
rect Statements (§ 60.33). 

23. Specific FFS Compliance Requirements 

(§ 60.35). 

24. [Reserved] 
25. FFS Qualification on the Basis of a Bilat-

eral Aviation Safety Agreement (BASA) 
(§ 60.37). 

Attachment 1 to Appendix A to Part 60— 

General Simulator Requirements. 

Attachment 2 to Appendix A to Part 60—FFS 

Objective Tests. 

Attachment 3 to Appendix A to Part 60— 

Simulator Subjective Evaluation. 

Attachment 4 to Appendix A to Part 60— 

Sample Documents. 

Attachment 5 to Appendix A to Part 60— 

Simulator Qualification Requirements 
for Windshear Training Program Use. 

Attachment 6 to Appendix A to Part 60— 

FSTD Directives Applicable to Airplane 
Flight Simulators. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00028

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

19 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

1. I

NTRODUCTION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

a. This appendix contains background in-

formation as well as regulatory and inform-
ative material as described later in this sec-
tion. To assist the reader in determining 
what areas are required and what areas are 
permissive, the text in this appendix is di-
vided into two sections: ‘‘QPS Require-
ments’’ and ‘‘Information.’’ The QPS Re-
quirements sections contain details regard-
ing compliance with the part 60 rule lan-
guage. These details are regulatory, but are 
found only in this appendix. The Information 
sections contain material that is advisory in 
nature, and designed to give the user general 
information about the regulation. 

b. [Reserved] 
c. The responsible Flight Standards office 

encourages the use of electronic media for 
all communication, including any record, re-
port, request, test, or statement required by 
this appendix. The electronic media used 
must have adequate security provisions and 
be acceptable to the responsible Flight 
Standards office. 

d. Related Reading References. 
(1) 14 CFR part 60. 
(2) 14 CFR part 61. 
(3) 14 CFR part 63. 
(4) 14 CFR part 119. 
(5) 14 CFR part 121. 
(6) 14 CFR part 125. 
(7) 14 CFR part 135. 
(8) 14 CFR part 141. 
(9) 14 CFR part 142. 
(10) AC 120–28, as amended, Criteria for Ap-

proval of Category III Landing Weather 
Minima. 

(11) AC 120–29, as amended, Criteria for Ap-

proving Category I and Category II Landing 
Minima for part 121 operators. 

(12) AC 120–35, as amended, Flightcrew 

Member, Line Operational Simulations: 
Line-Oriented Flight Training, Special Pur-
pose Operational Training, Line Operational 
Evaluation. 

(13) AC 120–40, as amended, Airplane Simu-

lator Qualification. 

(14) AC 120–41, as amended, Criteria for 

Operational Approval of Airborne Wind 
Shear Alerting and Flight Guidance Sys-
tems. 

(15) AC 120–57, as amended, Surface Move-

ment Guidance and Control System 
(SMGCS). 

(16) AC 150/5300–13, as amended, Airport De-

sign. 

(17) AC 150/5340–1, as amended, Standards 

for Airport Markings. 

(18) AC 150/5340–4, as amended, Installation 

Details for Runway Centerline Touchdown 
Zone Lighting Systems. 

(19) AC 150/5340–19, as amended, Taxiway 

Centerline Lighting System. 

(20) AC 150/5340–24, as amended, Runway 

and Taxiway Edge Lighting System. 

(21) AC 150/5345–28, as amended, Precision 

Approach Path Indicator (PAPI) Systems. 

(22) International Air Transport Associa-

tion document, ‘‘Flight Simulation Training 
Device Design and Performance Data Re-
quirements,’’ as amended. 

(23) AC 25–7, as amended, Flight Test Guide 

for Certification of Transport Category Air-
planes. 

(24) AC 23–8, as amended, Flight Test Guide 

for Certification of Part 23 Airplanes. 

(25) International Civil Aviation Organiza-

tion (ICAO) Manual of Criteria for the Quali-
fication of Flight Simulation Training De-
vices, as amended. 

(26) Aeroplane Flight Simulation Training 

Device Evaluation Handbook, Volume I, as 
amended and Volume II, as amended, The 
Royal Aeronautical Society, London, UK. 

(27) FAA Airman Certification Standards 

and Practical Test Standards for Airline 
Transport Pilot, Type Ratings, Commercial 
Pilot, and Instrument Ratings 

(28) The FAA Aeronautical Information 

Manual (AIM). An electronic version of the 
AIM is on the Internet at 

http://www.faa.gov/ 

atpubs. 

(29) Aeronautical Radio, Inc. (ARINC) doc-

ument number 436, titled 

Guidelines For Elec-

tronic Qualification Test Guide (as amended). 

(30) Aeronautical Radio, Inc. (ARINC) doc-

ument 610, 

Guidance for Design and Integra-

tion of Aircraft Avionics Equipment in Simula-
tors 
(as amended). 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

2. A

PPLICABILITY

(§§ 60.1 

AND

60.2) 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

No additional regulatory or informational 

material applies to § 60.1, Applicability, or to 
§ 60.2, Applicability of sponsor rules to per-
sons who are not sponsors and who are en-
gaged in certain unauthorized activities. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

3. D

EFINITIONS

(§ 60.3) 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

See Appendix F of this part for a list of 

definitions and abbreviations from part 1 and 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00029

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

20 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

part 60, including the appropriate appendices 
of part 60. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

4. Q

UALIFICATION

P

ERFORMANCE

S

TANDARDS

 

(§ 60.4) 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

No additional regulatory or informational 

material applies to § 60.4, Qualification Per-
formance Standards. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

5. Q

UALITY

M

ANAGEMENT

S

YSTEM

(§ 60.5) 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

See Appendix E of this part for additional 

regulatory and informational material re-
garding Quality Management Systems. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

6. S

PONSOR

Q

UALIFICATION

R

EQUIREMENTS

 

(§ 60.7) 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

a. The intent of the language in § 60.7(b) is 

to have a specific FFS, identified by the 
sponsor, used at least once in an FAA-ap-
proved flight training program for the air-
plane simulated during the 12-month period 
described. The identification of the specific 
FFS may change from one 12-month period 
to the next 12-month period as long as the 
sponsor sponsors and uses at least one FFS 
at least once during the prescribed period. 
No minimum number of hours or minimum 
FFS periods are required. 

b. The following examples describe accept-

able operational practices: 

(1) Example One. 
(a) A sponsor is sponsoring a single, spe-

cific FFS for its own use, in its own facility 
or elsewhere—this single FFS forms the 
basis for the sponsorship. The sponsor uses 
that FFS at least once in each 12-month pe-
riod in the sponsor’s FAA-approved flight 
training program for the airplane simulated. 
This 12-month period is established accord-
ing to the following schedule: 

(i) If the FFS was qualified prior to May 30, 

2008, the 12-month period begins on the date 
of the first continuing qualification evalua-
tion conducted in accordance with § 60.19 
after May 30, 2008, and continues for each 
subsequent 12-month period; 

(ii) A device qualified on or after May 30, 

2008, will be required to undergo an initial or 
upgrade evaluation in accordance with 
§ 60.15. Once the initial or upgrade evaluation 
is complete, the first continuing qualifica-
tion evaluation will be conducted within 6 
months. The 12-month continuing qualifica-
tion evaluation cycle begins on that date and 
continues for each subsequent 12-month pe-
riod. 

(b) There is no minimum number of hours 

of FFS use required. 

(c) The identification of the specific FFS 

may change from one 12-month period to the 
next 12-month period as long as the sponsor 
sponsors and uses at least one FFS at least 
once during the prescribed period. 

(2) Example Two. 
(a) A sponsor sponsors an additional num-

ber of FFSs, in its facility or elsewhere. 
Each additionally sponsored FFS must be— 

(i) Used by the sponsor in the sponsor’s 

FAA-approved flight training program for 
the airplane simulated (as described in 
§ 60.7(d)(1)); 

OR 

(ii) Used by another FAA certificate holder 

in that other certificate holder’s FAA-ap-
proved flight training program for the air-
plane simulated (as described in § 60.7(d)(1)). 
This 12-month period is established in the 
same manner as in example one; 

OR 

(iii) Provided a statement each year from a 

qualified pilot (after having flown the air-
plane, not the subject FFS or another FFS, 
during the preceding 12-month period), stat-
ing that the subject FFS’s performance and 
handling qualities represent the airplane (as 
described in § 60.7(d)(2)). This statement is 
provided at least once in each 12-month pe-
riod established in the same manner as in ex-
ample one. 

(b) No minimum number of hours of FFS 

use is required. 

(3) Example Three. 
(a) A sponsor in New York (in this exam-

ple, a Part 142 certificate holder) establishes 
‘‘satellite’’ training centers in Chicago and 
Moscow. 

(b) The satellite function means that the 

Chicago and Moscow centers must operate 
under the New York center’s certificate (in 
accordance with all of the New York center’s 
practices, procedures, and policies; e.g., in-
structor and/or technician training/checking 
requirements, record keeping, QMS pro-
gram). 

(c) All of the FFSs in the Chicago and Mos-

cow centers could be dry-leased (i.e., the cer-
tificate holder does not have and use FAA- 
approved flight training programs for the 
FFSs in the Chicago and Moscow centers) be-
cause— 

(i) Each FFS in the Chicago center and 

each FFS in the Moscow center is used at 
least once each 12-month period by another 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00030

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

21 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

FAA certificate holder in that other certifi-
cate holder’s FAA-approved flight training 
program for the airplane (as described in 
§ 60.7(d)(1)); 

OR 

(ii) A statement is obtained from a quali-

fied pilot (having flown the airplane, not the 
subject FFS or another FFS, during the pre-
ceding 12-month period) stating that the per-
formance and handling qualities of each FFS 
in the Chicago and Moscow centers rep-
resents the airplane (as described in 
§ 60.7(d)(2)). 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

7. A

DDITIONAL

R

ESPONSIBILITIES OF THE

 

S

PONSOR

(§ 60.9) 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

The phrase ‘‘as soon as practicable’’ in 

§ 60.9(a) means without unnecessarily dis-
rupting or delaying beyond a reasonable 
time the training, evaluation, or experience 
being conducted in the FFS. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

8. FFS U

SE

(§ 60.11) 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

No additional regulatory or informational 

material applies to § 60.11, Simulator Use. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

9. FFS O

BJECTIVE

D

ATA

R

EQUIREMENTS

 

(§ 60.13) 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

a. Flight test data used to validate FFS 

performance and handling qualities must 
have been gathered in accordance with a 
flight test program containing the following: 

(1) A flight test plan consisting of: 
(a) The maneuvers and procedures required 

for aircraft certification and simulation pro-
gramming and validation. 

(b) For each maneuver or procedure— 
(i) The procedures and control input the 

flight test pilot and/or engineer used. 

(ii) The atmospheric and environmental 

conditions. 

(iii) The initial flight conditions. 
(iv) The airplane configuration, including 

weight and center of gravity. 

(v) The data to be gathered. 

(vi) All other information necessary to 

recreate the flight test conditions in the 
FFS. 

(2) Appropriately qualified flight test per-

sonnel. 

(3) An understanding of the accuracy of the 

data to be gathered using appropriate alter-
native data sources, procedures, and instru-
mentation that is traceable to a recognized 
standard as described in Attachment 2, Table 
A2E of this appendix. 

(4) Appropriate and sufficient data acquisi-

tion equipment or system(s), including ap-
propriate data reduction and analysis meth-
ods and techniques, as would be acceptable 
to the FAA’s Aircraft Certification Service. 

b. The data, regardless of source, must be 

presented as follows: 

(1) In a format that supports the FFS vali-

dation process. 

(2) In a manner that is clearly readable and 

annotated correctly and completely. 

(3) With resolution sufficient to determine 

compliance with the tolerances set forth in 
Attachment 2, Table A2A of this appendix. 

(4) With any necessary instructions or 

other details provided, such as yaw damper 
or throttle position. 

(5) Without alteration, adjustments, or 

bias. Data may be corrected to address 
known data calibration errors provided that 
an explanation of the methods used to cor-
rect the errors appears in the QTG. The cor-
rected data may be re-scaled, digitized, or 
otherwise manipulated to fit the desired 
presentation. 

c. After completion of any additional flight 

test, a flight test report must be submitted 
in support of the validation data. The report 
must contain sufficient data and rationale to 
support qualification of the FFS at the level 
requested. 

d. As required by § 60.13(f), the sponsor 

must notify the responsible Flight Standards 
office when it becomes aware that an addi-
tion to, an amendment to, or a revision of 
data that may relate to FFS performance or 
handling characteristics is available. The 
data referred to in this paragraph is data 
used to validate the performance, handling 
qualities, or other characteristics of the air-
craft, including data related to any relevant 
changes occurring after the type certificate 
was issued. The sponsor must— 

(1) Within 10 calendar days, notify the re-

sponsible Flight Standards office of the ex-
istence of this data; and 

(2) Within 45 calendar days, notify the re-

sponsible Flight Standards office of— 

(a) The schedule to incorporate this data 

into the FFS; or 

(b) The reason for not incorporating this 

data into the FFS. 

e. In those cases where the objective test 

results authorize a ‘‘snapshot test’’ or a ‘‘se-
ries of snapshot tests’’ results in lieu of a 
time-history result, the sponsor or other 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00031

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

22 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

data provider must ensure that a steady 
state condition exists at the instant of time 
captured by the ‘‘snapshot.’’ The steady 
state condition must exist from 4 seconds 
prior to, through 1 second following, the in-
stant of time captured by the snapshot. 

E

ND

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

f. The FFS sponsor is encouraged to main-

tain a liaison with the manufacturer of the 
aircraft being simulated (or with the holder 
of the aircraft type certificate for the air-
craft being simulated if the manufacturer is 
no longer in business), and, if appropriate, 
with the person having supplied the aircraft 
data package for the FFS in order to facili-
tate the notification required by § 60.13(f). 

g. It is the intent of the responsible Flight 

Standards office that for new aircraft enter-
ing service, at a point well in advance of 
preparation of the Qualification Test Guide 
(QTG), the sponsor should submit to the re-
sponsible Flight Standards office for ap-
proval, a descriptive document (see Table 
A2C, Sample Validation Data Roadmap for 
Airplanes) containing the plan for acquiring 
the validation data, including data sources. 
This document should clearly identify 
sources of data for all required tests, a de-
scription of the validity of these data for a 
specific engine type and thrust rating con-
figuration, and the revision levels of all avi-
onics affecting the performance or flying 
qualities of the aircraft. Additionally, this 
document should provide other information, 
such as the rationale or explanation for 
cases where data or data parameters are 
missing, instances where engineering sim-
ulation data are used or where flight test 
methods require further explanations. It 
should also provide a brief narrative describ-
ing the cause and effect of any deviation 
from data requirements. The aircraft manu-
facturer may provide this document. 

h. There is no requirement for any flight 

test data supplier to submit a flight test 
plan or program prior to gathering flight 
test data. However, the responsible Flight 
Standards office notes that inexperienced 
data gatherers often provide data that is ir-
relevant, improperly marked, or lacking ade-
quate justification for selection. Other prob-
lems include inadequate information regard-
ing initial conditions or test maneuvers. The 
responsible Flight Standards office has been 
forced to refuse these data submissions as 
validation data for an FFS evaluation. It is 
for this reason that the responsible Flight 
Standards office recommends that any data 
supplier not previously experienced in this 
area review the data necessary for program-
ming and for validating the performance of 
the FFS, and discuss the flight test plan an-

ticipated for acquiring such data with the re-
sponsible Flight Standards office well in ad-
vance of commencing the flight tests. 

i. The responsible Flight Standards office 

will consider, on a case-by-case basis, wheth-
er to approve supplemental validation data 
derived from flight data recording systems, 
such as a Quick Access Recorder or Flight 
Data Recorder. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

10. S

PECIAL

E

QUIPMENT AND

P

ERSONNEL

R

E

-

QUIREMENTS

FOR

Q

UALIFICATION

OF

THE

 

FFS

S

(§ 60.14) 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

a. In the event that the responsible Flight 

Standards office determines that special 
equipment or specifically qualified persons 
will be required to conduct an evaluation, 
the responsible Flight Standards office will 
make every attempt to notify the sponsor at 
least one (1) week, but in no case less than 72 
hours, in advance of the evaluation. Exam-
ples of special equipment include spot 
photometers, flight control measurement de-
vices, and sound analyzers. Examples of spe-
cially qualified personnel include individuals 
specifically qualified to install or use any 
special equipment when its use is required. 

b. Examples of a special evaluation include 

an evaluation conducted after an FFS is 
moved, at the request of the TPAA, or as a 
result of comments received from users of 
the FFS that raise questions about the con-
tinued qualification or use of the FFS. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

11. I

NITIAL

(

AND

U

PGRADE

) Q

UALIFICATION

 

R

EQUIREMENTS

(§ 60.15) 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

a. In order to be qualified at a particular 

qualification level, the FFS must: 

(1) Meet the general requirements listed in 

Attachment 1 of this appendix; 

(2) Meet the objective testing requirements 

listed in Attachment 2 of this appendix; and 

(3) Satisfactorily accomplish the subjec-

tive tests listed in Attachment 3 of this ap-
pendix. 

b. The request described in § 60.15(a) must 

include all of the following: 

(1) A statement that the FFS meets all of 

the applicable provisions of this part and all 
applicable provisions of the QPS. 

(2) Unless otherwise authorized through 

prior coordination with the responsible 
Flight Standards office, a confirmation that 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00032

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

23 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

the sponsor will forward to the responsible 
Flight Standards office the statement de-
scribed in § 60.15(b) in such time as to be re-
ceived no later than 5 business days prior to 
the scheduled evaluation and may be for-
warded to the responsible Flight Standards 
office via traditional or electronic means. 

(3) A QTG, acceptable to the responsible 

Flight Standards office, that includes all of 
the following: 

(a) Objective data obtained from tradi-

tional aircraft testing or another approved 
source. 

(b) Correlating objective test results ob-

tained from the performance of the FFS as 
prescribed in the appropriate QPS. 

(c) The result of FFS subjective tests pre-

scribed in the appropriate QPS. 

(d) A description of the equipment nec-

essary to perform the evaluation for initial 
qualification and the continuing qualifica-
tion evaluations. 

c. The QTG described in paragraph (a)(3) of 

this section, must provide the documented 
proof of compliance with the simulator ob-
jective tests in Attachment 2, Table A2A of 
this appendix. 

d. The QTG is prepared and submitted by 

the sponsor, or the sponsor’s agent on behalf 
of the sponsor, to the responsible Flight 
Standards office for review and approval, and 
must include, for each objective test: 

(1) Parameters, tolerances, and flight con-

ditions; 

(2) Pertinent and complete instructions for 

the conduct of automatic and manual tests; 

(3) A means of comparing the FFS test re-

sults to the objective data; 

(4) Any other information as necessary, to 

assist in the evaluation of the test results; 

(5) Other information appropriate to the 

qualification level of the FFS. 

e. The QTG described in paragraphs (a)(3) 

and (b) of this section, must include the fol-
lowing: 

(1) A QTG cover page with sponsor and 

FAA approval signature blocks (see Attach-
ment 4, Figure A4C, of this appendix for a 
sample QTG cover page). 

(2) [Reserved] 
(3) An FFS information page that provides 

the information listed in this paragraph (see 
Attachment 4, Figure A4B, of this appendix 
for a sample FFS information page). For 
convertible FFSs, the sponsor must submit a 
separate page for each configuration of the 
FFS. 

(a) The sponsor’s FFS identification num-

ber or code. 

(b) The airplane model and series being 

simulated. 

(c) The aerodynamic data revision number 

or reference. 

(d) The source of the basic aerodynamic 

model and the aerodynamic coefficient data 
used to modify the basic model. 

(e) The engine model(s) and its data revi-

sion number or reference. 

(f) The flight control data revision number 

or reference. 

(g) The flight management system identi-

fication and revision level. 

(h) The FFS model and manufacturer. 
(i) The date of FFS manufacture. 
(j) The FFS computer identification. 
(k) The visual system model and manufac-

turer, including display type. 

(l) The motion system type and manufac-

turer, including degrees of freedom. 

(4) A Table of Contents. 
(5) A log of revisions and a list of effective 

pages. 

(6) A list of all relevant data references. 
(7) A glossary of terms and symbols used 

(including sign conventions and units). 

(8) Statements of Compliance and Capa-

bility (SOCs) with certain requirements. 

(9) Recording procedures or equipment re-

quired to accomplish the objective tests. 

(10) The following information for each ob-

jective test designated in Attachment 2, 
Table A2A, of this appendix as applicable to 
the qualification level sought: 

(a) Name of the test. 
(b) Objective of the test. 
(c) Initial conditions. 
(d) Manual test procedures. 
(e) Automatic test procedures (if applica-

ble). 

(f) Method for evaluating FFS objective 

test results. 

(g) List of all relevant parameters driven 

or constrained during the automatically con-
ducted test(s). 

(h) List of all relevant parameters driven 

or constrained during the manually con-
ducted test(s). 

(i) Tolerances for relevant parameters. 
(j) Source of Validation Data (document 

and page number). 

(k) Copy of the Validation Data (if located 

in a separate binder, a cross reference for the 
identification and page number for pertinent 
data location must be provided). 

(l) Simulator Objective Test Results as ob-

tained by the sponsor. Each test result must 
reflect the date completed and must be 
clearly labeled as a product of the device 
being tested. 

f. A convertible FFS is addressed as a sepa-

rate FFS for each model and series airplane 
to which it will be converted and for the 
FAA qualification level sought. If a sponsor 
seeks qualification for two or more models of 
an airplane type using a convertible FFS, 
the sponsor must submit a QTG for each air-
plane model, or a QTG for the first airplane 
model and a supplement to that QTG for 
each additional airplane model. The respon-
sible Flight Standards office will conduct 
evaluations for each airplane model. 

g. Form and manner of presentation of ob-

jective test results in the QTG: 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00033

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

24 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

(1) The sponsor’s FFS test results must be 

recorded in a manner acceptable to the re-
sponsible Flight Standards office, that al-
lows easy comparison of the FFS test results 
to the validation data (e.g., use of a multi- 
channel recorder, line printer, cross plotting, 
overlays, transparencies). 

(2) FFS results must be labeled using ter-

minology common to airplane parameters as 
opposed to computer software identifica-
tions. 

(3) Validation data documents included in 

a QTG may be photographically reduced only 
if such reduction will not alter the graphic 
scaling or cause difficulties in scale interpre-
tation or resolution. 

(4) Scaling on graphical presentations 

must provide the resolution necessary to 
evaluate the parameters shown in Attach-
ment 2, Table A2A of this appendix. 

(5) Tests involving time histories, data 

sheets (or transparencies thereof) and FFS 
test results must be clearly marked with ap-
propriate reference points to ensure an accu-
rate comparison between the FFS and the 
airplane with respect to time. Time histories 
recorded via a line printer are to be clearly 
identified for cross plotting on the airplane 
data. Over-plots must not obscure the ref-
erence data. 

h. The sponsor may elect to complete the 

QTG objective and subjective tests at the 
manufacturer’s facility or at the sponsor’s 
training facility (or other sponsor designated 
location where training will take place). If 
the tests are conducted at the manufactur-
er’s facility, the sponsor must repeat at least 
one-third of the tests at the sponsor’s train-
ing facility in order to substantiate FFS per-
formance. The QTG must be clearly anno-
tated to indicate when and where each test 
was accomplished. Tests conducted at the 
manufacturer’s facility and at the sponsor’s 
designated training facility must be con-
ducted after the FFS is assembled with sys-
tems and sub-systems functional and oper-
ating in an interactive manner. The test re-
sults must be submitted to the responsible 
Flight Standards office. 

i. The sponsor must maintain a copy of the 

MQTG at the FFS location. 

j. All FFSs for which the initial qualifica-

tion is conducted after May 30, 2014, must 
have an electronic MQTG (eMQTG) including 
all objective data obtained from airplane 
testing, or another approved source (refor-
matted or digitized), together with corre-
lating objective test results obtained from 
the performance of the FFS (reformatted or 
digitized) as prescribed in this appendix. The 
eMQTG must also contain the general FFS 
performance or demonstration results (refor-
matted or digitized) prescribed in this appen-
dix, and a description of the equipment nec-
essary to perform the initial qualification 
evaluation and the continuing qualification 
evaluations. The eMQTG must include the 

original validation data used to validate 
FFS performance and handling qualities in 
either the original digitized format from the 
data supplier or an electronic scan of the 
original time-history plots that were pro-
vided by the data supplier. A copy of the 
eMQTG must be provided to the responsible 
Flight Standards office. 

k. All other FFSs not covered in subpara-

graph ‘‘j’’ must have an electronic copy of 
the MQTG by May 30, 2014. An electronic 
copy of the MQTG must be provided to the 
responsible Flight Standards office. This 
may be provided by an electronic scan pre-
sented in a Portable Document File (PDF), 
or similar format acceptable to the respon-
sible Flight Standards office. 

l. During the initial (or upgrade) qualifica-

tion evaluation conducted by the responsible 
Flight Standards office, the sponsor must 
also provide a person who is a user of the de-
vice (e.g., a qualified pilot or instructor pilot 
with flight time experience in that aircraft) 
and knowledgeable about the operation of 
the aircraft and the operation of the FFS. 

E

ND

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

m. Only those FFSs that are sponsored by 

a certificate holder as defined in Appendix F 
of this part will be evaluated by the respon-
sible Flight Standards office. However, other 
FFS evaluations may be conducted on a 
case-by-case basis as the Administrator 
deems appropriate, but only in accordance 
with applicable agreements. 

n. The responsible Flight Standards office 

will conduct an evaluation for each configu-
ration, and each FFS must be evaluated as 
completely as possible. To ensure a thorough 
and uniform evaluation, each FFS is sub-
jected to the general simulator requirements 
in Attachment 1 of this appendix, the objec-
tive tests listed in Attachment 2 of this ap-
pendix, and the subjective tests listed in At-
tachment 3 of this appendix. The evaluations 
described herein will include, but not nec-
essarily be limited to the following: 

(1) Airplane responses, including longitu-

dinal and lateral-directional control re-
sponses (see Attachment 2 of this appendix); 

(2) Performance in authorized portions of 

the simulated airplane’s operating envelope, 
to include tasks evaluated by the responsible 
Flight Standards office in the areas of sur-
face operations, takeoff, climb, cruise, de-
scent, approach, and landing as well as ab-
normal and emergency operations (see At-
tachment 2 of this appendix); 

(3) Control checks (see Attachment 1 and 

Attachment 2 of this appendix); 

(4) Flight deck configuration (see Attach-

ment 1 of this appendix); 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00034

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

25 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

(5) Pilot, flight engineer, and instructor 

station functions checks (see Attachment 1 
and Attachment 3 of this appendix); 

(6) Airplane systems and sub-systems (as 

appropriate) as compared to the airplane 
simulated (see Attachment 1 and Attach-
ment 3 of this appendix); 

(7) FFS systems and sub-systems, includ-

ing force cueing (motion), visual, and aural 
(sound) systems, as appropriate (see Attach-
ment 1 and Attachment 2 of this appendix); 
and 

(8) Certain additional requirements, de-

pending upon the qualification level sought, 
including equipment or circumstances that 
may become hazardous to the occupants. The 
sponsor may be subject to Occupational 
Safety and Health Administration require-
ments. 

o. The responsible Flight Standards office 

administers the objective and subjective 
tests, which includes an examination of func-
tions. The tests include a qualitative assess-
ment of the FFS by a pilot from the respon-
sible Flight Standards office. The evaluation 
team leader may assign other qualified per-
sonnel to assist in accomplishing the func-
tions examination and/or the objective and 
subjective tests performed during an evalua-
tion when required. 

(1) Objective tests provide a basis for meas-

uring and evaluating FFS performance and 
determining compliance with the require-
ments of this part. 

(2) Subjective tests provide a basis for: 
(a) Evaluating the capability of the FFS to 

perform over a typical utilization period; 

(b) Determining that the FFS satisfac-

torily simulates each required task; 

(c) Verifying correct operation of the FFS 

controls, instruments, and systems; and 

(d) Demonstrating compliance with the re-

quirements of this part. 

p. The tolerances for the test parameters 

listed in Attachment 2 of this appendix re-
flect the range of tolerances acceptable to 
the responsible Flight Standards office for 
FFS validation and are not to be confused 
with design tolerances specified for FFS 
manufacture. In making decisions regarding 
tests and test results, the responsible Flight 
Standards office relies on the use of oper-
ational and engineering judgment in the ap-
plication of data (including consideration of 
the way in which the flight test was flown 
and the way the data was gathered and ap-
plied), data presentations, and the applicable 
tolerances for each test. 

q. In addition to the scheduled continuing 

qualification evaluation, each FFS is subject 
to evaluations conducted by the responsible 
Flight Standards office at any time without 
prior notification to the sponsor. Such eval-
uations would be accomplished in a normal 
manner (i.e., requiring exclusive use of the 
FFS for the conduct of objective and subjec-
tive tests and an examination of functions) if 

the FFS is not being used for flight crew-
member training, testing, or checking. How-
ever, if the FFS were being used, the evalua-
tion would be conducted in a non-exclusive 
manner. This non-exclusive evaluation will 
be conducted by the FFS evaluator accom-
panying the check airman, instructor, Air-
crew Program Designee (APD), or FAA in-
spector aboard the FFS along with the stu-
dent(s) and observing the operation of the 
FFS during the training, testing, or check-
ing activities. 

r. Problems with objective test results are 

handled as follows: 

(1) If a problem with an objective test re-

sult is detected by the evaluation team dur-
ing an evaluation, the test may be repeated 
or the QTG may be amended. 

(2) If it is determined that the results of an 

objective test do not support the level re-
quested but do support a lower level, the re-
sponsible Flight Standards office may qual-
ify the FFS at that lower level. For example, 
if a Level D evaluation is requested and the 
FFS fails to meet sound test tolerances, it 
could be qualified at Level C. 

s. After an FFS is successfully evaluated, 

the responsible Flight Standards office 
issues a Statement of Qualification (SOQ) to 
the sponsor. The responsible Flight Stand-
ards office recommends the FFS to the 
TPAA, who will approve the FFS for use in 
a flight training program. The SOQ will be 
issued at the satisfactory conclusion of the 
initial or continuing qualification evalua-
tion and will list the tasks for which the 
FFS is qualified, referencing the tasks de-
scribed in Table A1B in Attachment 1 of this 
appendix. However, it is the sponsor’s re-
sponsibility to obtain TPAA approval prior 
to using the FFS in an FAA-approved flight 
training program. 

t. Under normal circumstances, the respon-

sible Flight Standards office establishes a 
date for the initial or upgrade evaluation 
within ten (10) working days after deter-
mining that a complete QTG is acceptable. 
Unusual circumstances may warrant estab-
lishing an evaluation date before this deter-
mination is made. A sponsor may schedule 
an evaluation date as early as 6 months in 
advance. However, there may be a delay of 45 
days or more in rescheduling and completing 
the evaluation if the sponsor is unable to 
meet the scheduled date. See Attachment 4 
of this appendix, Figure A4A, Sample Re-
quest for Initial, Upgrade, or Reinstatement 
Evaluation. 

u. The numbering system used for objec-

tive test results in the QTG should closely 
follow the numbering system set out in At-
tachment 2 of this appendix, FFS Objective 
Tests, Table A2A. 

v. Contact the responsible Flight Stand-

ards office for additional information regard-
ing the preferred qualifications of pilots used 
to meet the requirements of § 60.15(d). 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00035

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

26 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

w. Examples of the exclusions for which 

the FFS might not have been subjectively 
tested by the sponsor or the responsible 
Flight Standards office and for which quali-
fication might not be sought or granted, as 
described in § 60.15(g)(6), include windshear 
training and circling approaches. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

12. A

DDITIONAL

Q

UALIFICATIONS FOR A

 

C

URRENTLY

Q

UALIFIED

FFS (§ 60.16) 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

No additional regulatory or informational 

material applies to § 60.16, Additional Quali-
fications for a Currently Qualified FFS. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

13. P

REVIOUSLY

Q

UALIFIED

FFS

S

(§ 60.17) 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

a. In instances where a sponsor plans to re-

move an FFS from active status for a period 
of less than two years, the following proce-
dures apply: 

(1) The responsible Flight Standards office 

must be notified in writing and the notifica-
tion must include an estimate of the period 
that the FFS will be inactive; 

(2) Continuing Qualification evaluations 

will not be scheduled during the inactive pe-
riod; 

(3) The responsible Flight Standards office 

will remove the FFS from the list of quali-
fied FSTDs on a mutually established date 
not later than the date on which the first 
missed continuing qualification evaluation 
would have been scheduled; 

(4) Before the FFS is restored to qualified 

status, it must be evaluated by the respon-
sible Flight Standards office. The evaluation 
content and the time required to accomplish 
the evaluation is based on the number of 
continuing qualification evaluations and 
sponsor-conducted quarterly inspections 
missed during the period of inactivity. 

(5) The sponsor must notify the responsible 

Flight Standards office of any changes to the 
original scheduled time out of service; 

b. Simulators qualified prior to May 31, 

2016, are not required to meet the general 
simulation requirements, the objective test 
requirements or the subjective test require-
ments of attachments 1, 2, and 3 of this ap-
pendix as long as the simulator continues to 
meet the test requirements contained in the 
MQTG developed under the original quali-
fication basis. 

c. After May 30, 2009, each visual scene or 

airport model beyond the minimum required 
for the FFS qualification level that is in-
stalled in and available for use in a qualified 
FFS must meet the requirements described 
in attachment 3 of this appendix. 

d. Simulators qualified prior to May 31, 

2016, may be updated. If an evaluation is 
deemed appropriate or necessary by the re-
sponsible Flight Standards office after such 
an update, the evaluation will not require an 
evaluation to standards beyond those 
against which the simulator was originally 
qualified. 

e. Other certificate holders or persons de-

siring to use an FFS may contract with FFS 
sponsors to use FFSs previously qualified at 
a particular level for an airplane type and 
approved for use within an FAA-approved 
flight training program. Such FFSs are not 
required to undergo an additional qualifica-
tion process, except as described in § 60.16. 

f. Each FFS user must obtain approval 

from the appropriate TPAA to use any FFS 
in an FAA-approved flight training program. 

g. The intent of the requirement listed in 

§ 60.17(b), for each FFS to have a SOQ within 
6 years, is to have the availability of that 
statement (including the configuration list 
and the limitations to authorizations) to 
provide a complete picture of the FFS inven-
tory regulated by the FAA. The issuance of 
the statement will not require any addi-
tional evaluation or require any adjustment 
to the evaluation basis for the FFS. 

h. Downgrading of an FFS is a permanent 

change in qualification level and will neces-
sitate the issuance of a revised SOQ to re-
flect the revised qualification level, as ap-
propriate. If a temporary restriction is 
placed on an FFS because of a missing, mal-
functioning, or inoperative component or on- 
going repairs, the restriction is not a perma-
nent change in qualification level. Instead, 
the restriction is temporary and is removed 
when the reason for the restriction has been 
resolved. 

i. The responsible Flight Standards office 

will determine the evaluation criteria for an 
FFS that has been removed from active sta-
tus. The criteria will be based on the number 
of continuing qualification evaluations and 
quarterly inspections missed during the pe-
riod of inactivity. For example, if the FFS 
were out of service for a 1 year period, it 
would be necessary to complete the entire 
QTG, since all of the quarterly evaluations 
would have been missed. The responsible 
Flight Standards office will also consider 
how the FFS was stored, whether parts were 
removed from the FFS and whether the FFS 
was disassembled. 

j. The FFS will normally be requalified 

using the FAA-approved MQTG and the cri-
teria that was in effect prior to its removal 
from qualification. However, inactive periods 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00036

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

27 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

of 2 years or more will require requalifica-
tion under the standards in effect and cur-
rent at the time of requalification. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

14. I

NSPECTION

, C

ONTINUING

Q

UALIFICATION

 

E

VALUATION

AND

M

AINTENANCE

R

EQUIRE

-

MENTS

(§ 60.19) 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

a. The sponsor must conduct a minimum of 

four evenly spaced inspections throughout 
the year. The objective test sequence and 
content of each inspection must be developed 
by the sponsor and must be acceptable to the 
responsible Flight Standards office. 

b. The description of the functional pre-

flight check must be contained in the spon-
sor’s QMS. 

c. Record ‘‘functional preflight’’ in the 

FFS discrepancy log book or other accept-
able location, including any item found to be 
missing, malfunctioning, or inoperative. 

d. During the continuing qualification 

evaluation conducted by the responsible 
Flight Standards office, the sponsor must 
also provide a person knowledgeable about 
the operation of the aircraft and the oper-
ation of the FFS. 

e. The responsible Flight Standards office 

will conduct continuing qualification evalua-
tions every 12 months unless: 

(1) The responsible Flight Standards office 

becomes aware of discrepancies or perform-
ance problems with the device that warrants 
more frequent evaluations; or 

(2) The sponsor implements a QMS that 

justifies less frequent evaluations. However, 
in no case shall the frequency of a con-
tinuing qualification evaluation exceed 36 
months. 

E

ND

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

f. The sponsor’s test sequence and the con-

tent of each quarterly inspection required in 
§ 60.19(a)(1) should include a balance and a 
mix from the objective test requirement 
areas listed as follows: 

(1) Performance. 
(2) Handling qualities. 
(3) Motion system (where appropriate). 
(4) Visual system (where appropriate). 
(5) Sound system (where appropriate). 
(6) Other FFS systems. 
g. If the evaluator plans to accomplish spe-

cific tests during a normal continuing quali-
fication evaluation that requires the use of 
special equipment or technicians, the spon-
sor will be notified as far in advance of the 
evaluation as practical; but not less than 72 

hours. Examples of such tests include 
latencies, control dynamics, sounds and vi-
brations, motion, and/or some visual system 
tests. 

h. The continuing qualification evalua-

tions, described in § 60.19(b), will normally re-
quire 4 hours of FFS time. However, flexi-
bility is necessary to address abnormal situ-
ations or situations involving aircraft with 
additional levels of complexity (e.g., com-
puter controlled aircraft). The sponsor 
should anticipate that some tests may re-
quire additional time. The continuing quali-
fication evaluations will consist of the fol-
lowing: 

(1) Review of the results of the quarterly 

inspections conducted by the sponsor since 
the last scheduled continuing qualification 
evaluation. 

(2) A selection of approximately 8 to 15 ob-

jective tests from the MQTG that provide an 
adequate opportunity to evaluate the per-
formance of the FFS. The tests chosen will 
be performed either automatically or manu-
ally and should be able to be conducted with-
in approximately one-third (

1

3

) of the allot-

ted FFS time. 

(3) A subjective evaluation of the FFS to 

perform a representative sampling of the 
tasks set out in attachment 3 of this appen-
dix. This portion of the evaluation should 
take approximately two-thirds (

2

3

) of the al-

lotted FFS time. 

(4) An examination of the functions of the 

FFS may include the motion system, visual 
system, sound system, instructor operating 
station, and the normal functions and simu-
lated malfunctions of the airplane systems. 
This examination is normally accomplished 
simultaneously with the subjective evalua-
tion requirements. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

15. L

OGGING

FFS D

ISCREPANCIES

(§ 60.20) 

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

No additional regulatory or informational 

material applies to § 60.20. Logging FFS Dis-
crepancies. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

16. I

NTERIM

Q

UALIFICATION OF

FFS

S FOR

N

EW

 

A

IRPLANE

T

YPES OR

M

ODELS

(§ 60.21) 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

No additional regulatory or informational 

material applies to § 60.21, Interim Qualifica-
tion of FFSs for New Airplane Types or Mod-
els. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00037

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

28 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

17. M

ODIFICATIONS TO

FFS

S

(§ 60.23) 

B

EGIN

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

a. The notification described in § 60.23(c)(2) 

must include a complete description of the 
planned modification, with a description of 
the operational and engineering effect the 
proposed modification will have on the oper-
ation of the FFS and the results that are ex-
pected with the modification incorporated. 

b. Prior to using the modified FFS: 
(1) All the applicable objective tests com-

pleted with the modification incorporated, 
including any necessary updates to the 
MQTG (e.g., accomplishment of FSTD Direc-
tives) must be acceptable to the responsible 
Flight Standards office; and 

(2) The sponsor must provide the respon-

sible Flight Standards office with a state-
ment signed by the MR that the factors list-
ed in § 60.15(b) are addressed by the appro-
priate personnel as described in that section. 

E

ND

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

FSTD Directives are considered modifica-

tions of an FFS. See Attachment 4 of this 
appendix for a sample index of effective 
FSTD Directives. See Attachment 6 of this 
appendix for a list of all effective FSTD Di-
rectives applicable to Airplane FFSs. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

18. O

PERATION

WITH

M

ISSING

, M

ALFUNC

-

TIONING

OR

I

NOPERATIVE

C

OMPONENTS

 

(§ 60.25) 

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

a. The sponsor’s responsibility with respect 

to § 60.25(a) is satisfied when the sponsor fair-
ly and accurately advises the user of the cur-
rent status of an FFS, including any miss-
ing, malfunctioning, or inoperative (MMI) 
component(s). 

b. It is the responsibility of the instructor, 

check airman, or representative of the ad-
ministrator conducting training, testing, or 
checking to exercise reasonable and prudent 
judgment to determine if any MMI compo-
nent is necessary for the satisfactory com-
pletion of a specific maneuver, procedure, or 
task. 

c. If the 29th or 30th day of the 30-day pe-

riod described in § 60.25(b) is on a Saturday, a 
Sunday, or a holiday, the FAA will extend 
the deadline until the next business day. 

d. In accordance with the authorization de-

scribed in § 60.25(b), the sponsor may develop 
a discrepancy prioritizing system to accom-

plish repairs based on the level of impact on 
the capability of the FFS. Repairs having a 
larger impact on FFS capability to provide 
the required training, evaluation, or flight 
experience will have a higher priority for re-
pair or replacement. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

19. A

UTOMATIC

L

OSS OF

Q

UALIFICATION AND

 

P

ROCEDURES

FOR

R

ESTORATION

OF

Q

UALI

-

FICATION

(§ 60.27) 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

If the sponsor provides a plan for how the 

FFS will be maintained during its out-of- 
service period (e.g., periodic exercise of me-
chanical, hydraulic, and electrical systems; 
routine replacement of hydraulic fluid; con-
trol of the environmental factors in which 
the FFS is to be maintained) there is a 
greater likelihood that the responsible 
Flight Standards office will be able to deter-
mine the amount of testing required for re-
qualification. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

20. O

THER

L

OSSES OF

Q

UALIFICATION AND

P

RO

-

CEDURES FOR

R

ESTORATION OF

Q

UALIFICA

-

TION

(§ 60.29) 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

If the sponsor provides a plan for how the 

FFS will be maintained during its out-of- 
service period (e.g., periodic exercise of me-
chanical, hydraulic, and electrical systems; 
routine replacement of hydraulic fluid; con-
trol of the environmental factors in which 
the FFS is to be maintained) there is a 
greater likelihood that the responsible 
Flight Standards office will be able to deter-
mine the amount of testing required for re-
qualification. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

21. R

ECORDKEEPING AND

R

EPORTING

(§ 60.31) 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

a. FFS modifications can include hardware 

or software changes. For FFS modifications 
involving software programming changes, 
the record required by § 60.31(a)(2) must con-
sist of the name of the aircraft system soft-
ware, aerodynamic model, or engine model 
change, the date of the change, a summary 
of the change, and the reason for the change. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00038

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

29 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

b. If a coded form for record keeping is 

used, it must provide for the preservation 
and retrieval of information with appro-
priate security or controls to prevent the in-
appropriate alteration of such records after 
the fact. 

E

ND

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

22. A

PPLICATIONS

, L

OGBOOKS

, R

EPORTS

AND

 

R

ECORDS

: F

RAUD

, F

ALSIFICATION

OR

I

NCOR

-

RECT

S

TATEMENTS

(§ 60.33) 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

No additional regulatory or informational 

material applies to § 60.33, Applications, 
Logbooks, Reports, and Records: Fraud, Fal-
sification, or Incorrect Statements. 

23. S

PECIFIC

FFS C

OMPLIANCE

R

EQUIREMENTS

 

(§ 60.35) 

No additional regulatory or informational 

material applies to § 60.35, Specific FFS Com-
pliance Requirements. 

24. [R

ESERVED

25. FFS Q

UALIFICATION ON THE

B

ASIS OF A

B

I

-

LATERAL

A

VIATION

S

AFETY

A

GREEMENT

 

(BASA) (§ 60.37) 

No additional regulatory or informational 

material applies to § 60.37, FFS Qualification 
on the Basis of a Bilateral Aviation Safety 
Agreement (BASA). 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

A

TTACHMENT

TO

A

PPENDIX

TO

P

ART

60— 

G

ENERAL

S

IMULATOR

R

EQUIREMENTS

 

B

EGIN

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

1. R

EQUIREMENTS

 

a. Certain requirements included in this 

appendix must be supported with an SOC as 
defined in Appendix F, which may include 
objective and subjective tests. The require-
ments for SOCs are indicated in the ‘‘General 
Simulator Requirements’’ column in Table 
A1A of this appendix. 

b. Table A1A describes the requirements 

for the indicated level of FFS. Many devices 
include operational systems or functions 
that exceed the requirements outlined in 
this section. However, all systems will be 
tested and evaluated in accordance with this 
appendix to ensure proper operation. 

E

ND

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

2. D

ISCUSSION

 

a. This attachment describes the general 

simulator requirements for qualifying an 
airplane FFS. The sponsor should also con-
sult the objective tests in Attachment 2 of 
this appendix and the examination of func-
tions and subjective tests listed in Attach-
ment 3 of this appendix to determine the 
complete requirements for a specific level 
simulator. 

b. The material contained in this attach-

ment is divided into the following cat-
egories: 

(1) General flight deck configuration. 
(2) Simulator programming. 
(3) Equipment operation. 
(4) Equipment and facilities for instructor/ 

evaluator functions. 

(5) Motion system. 
(6) Visual system. 
(7) Sound system. 
c. Table A1A provides the standards for the 

General Simulator Requirements. 

d. Table A1B provides the tasks that the 

sponsor will examine to determine whether 
the FFS satisfactorily meets the require-
ments for flight crew training, testing, and 
experience, and provides the tasks for which 
the simulator may be qualified. 

e. Table A1C provides the functions that an 

instructor/check airman must be able to con-
trol in the simulator. 

f. It is not required that all of the tasks 

that appear on the List of Qualified Tasks 
(part of the SOQ) be accomplished during the 
initial or continuing qualification evalua-
tion. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00039

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

30 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00040

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.000</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

31 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00041

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.001</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

32 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00042

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.002</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

33 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00043

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.003</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

34 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00044

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.004</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

35 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00045

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.005</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

36 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00046

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.006</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

37 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00047

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.007</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

38 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00048

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.008</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

39 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00049

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.009</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

40 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00050

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.010</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

41 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00051

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.011</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

42 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00052

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.012</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

43 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00053

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.013</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

44 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00054

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.014</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

45 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00055

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.015</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

46 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00056

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.016</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

47 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

T

ABLE

A1B—T

ABLE OF

T

ASKS VS

. S

IMULATOR

L

EVEL

 

QPS requirements 

Information 

Entry No. 

Subjective requirements 

In order to be qualified at the simulator qualification level indi-

cated, the simulator must be able to perform at least the 

tasks associated with that level of qualification. 

Simulator levels 

Notes 

A B C D 

1. Preflight Procedures 

1.a. ...........

Preflight Inspection (flight deck only) ........................................

1.b. ...........

Engine 

Start ..............................................................................

X X X X 

1.c. ...........

Taxiing .......................................................................................

R X X 

1.d. ...........

Pre-takeoff 

Checks ...................................................................

X X X X 

2. Takeoff and Departure Phase 

2.a. ...........

Normal and Crosswind Takeoff 

2.b. ...........

Instrument 

Takeoff ....................................................................

X X X X 

2.c. ...........

Engine Failure During Takeoff ..................................................

2.d. ...........

Rejected 

Takeoff .......................................................................

X X X X 

2.e. ...........

Departure 

Procedure ................................................................

X X X X 

3. Inflight Maneuvers 

3.a. ...........

Steep 

Turns ..............................................................................

X X X X 

3.b. High 

Angle of 
Attack 
Maneu-
vers 

3.b.1 .........

Approaches 

to 

Stall ...................................................................

X X X X 

3.b.2 .........

Full Stall ....................................................................................

Stall maneuvers at angles of 

attack above the activation 
of the stall warning system. 

Required only for FSTDs 

qualified to conduct full stall 
training tasks as indicated 
on the Statement of Quali-
fication. 

3.c. ...........

Engine 

Failure—Multiengine 

Airplane ......................................

X X X X 

3.d. ...........

Engine Failure—Single-Engine Airplane ..................................

3.e. ...........

Specific Flight Characteristics incorporated into the user’s 

FAA approved flight training program.

A A A A 

3.f. ............

Recovery From Unusual Attitudes ............................................

Within the normal flight enve-

lope supported by applicable 
simulation validation data. 

3.g. ...........

Upset Prevention and Recovery Training (UPRT) ...................

Upset recovery or unusual atti-

tude training maneuvers 
within the FSTD’s validation 
envelope that are intended 
to exceed pitch attitudes 
greater than 25 degrees 
nose up; pitch attitudes 
greater than 10 degrees 
nose down, and bank an-
gles greater than 45 de-
grees. 

4. Instrument Procedures 

4.a. ...........

Standard Terminal Arrival/Flight Management System Arrivals 

Procedures.

X X X X 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00057

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

48 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

T

ABLE

A1B—T

ABLE OF

T

ASKS VS

. S

IMULATOR

L

EVEL

—Continued 

QPS requirements 

Information 

Entry No. 

Subjective requirements 

In order to be qualified at the simulator qualification level indi-

cated, the simulator must be able to perform at least the 

tasks associated with that level of qualification. 

Simulator levels 

Notes 

A B C D 

4.b. ...........

Holding ......................................................................................

X X X X 

4.c. ...........

Precision Instrument.

4.c.1. ........

All Engines Operating ...............................................................

e.g., Autopilot, Manual (Flt. 

Dir. Assisted), Manual (Raw 
Data). 

4.c.2. ........

One Engine Inoperative ............................................................

e.g., Manual (Flt. Dir. As-

sisted), Manual (Raw Data). 

4.d. ...........

Non-Precision Instrument Approach .........................................

e.g., NDB, VOR, VOR/DME, 

VOR/TAC, RNAV, LOC, 
LOC/BC, ADF, and SDF. 

4.e. ...........

Circling Approach ......................................................................

Specific authorization required. 

4.f. ............

Missed Approach.

4.f.1. .........

Normal .......................................................................................

X X X X 

4.f.2. .........

One 

Engine 

Inoperative ............................................................

X X X X 

5. Landings and Approaches to Landings 

5.a. ...........

Normal and Crosswind Approaches and Landings ..................

5.b. ...........

Landing From a Precision/Non-Precision Approach ................

5.c. ...........

Approach and Landing with (Simulated) Engine Failure—Mul-

tiengine Airplane.

....

R X X 

5.d. ...........

Landing From Circling Approach ..............................................

5.e. ...........

Rejected 

Landing ......................................................................

X X X X 

5.f. ............

Landing From a No Flap or a Nonstandard Flap Configuration 

Approach.

R X X 

6. Normal and Abnormal Procedures 

6.a. ...........

Engine (including shutdown and restart) ..................................

6.b. ...........

Fuel 

System ..............................................................................

X X X X 

6.c. ...........

Electrical 

System ......................................................................

X X X X 

6.d. ...........

Hydraulic 

System ......................................................................

X X X X 

6.e. ...........

Environmental and Pressurization Systems .............................

6.f. ............

Fire Detection and Extinguisher Systems ................................

6.g. ...........

Navigation and Avionics Systems ............................................

6.h. ...........

Automatic Flight Control System, Electronic Flight Instrument 

System, and Related Subsystems.

X X X X 

6.i. ............

Flight Control Systems ..............................................................

6.j. ............

Anti-ice and Deice Systems ......................................................

6.k. ...........

Aircraft and Personal Emergency Equipment ..........................

7. Emergency Procedures 

7.a. ...........

Emergency Descent (Max. Rate) .............................................

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00058

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

49 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

T

ABLE

A1B—T

ABLE OF

T

ASKS VS

. S

IMULATOR

L

EVEL

—Continued 

QPS requirements 

Information 

Entry No. 

Subjective requirements 

In order to be qualified at the simulator qualification level indi-

cated, the simulator must be able to perform at least the 

tasks associated with that level of qualification. 

Simulator levels 

Notes 

A B C D 

7.b. ...........

Inflight Fire and Smoke Removal .............................................

7.c. ...........

Rapid 

Decompression ...............................................................

X X X X 

7.d. ...........

Emergency 

Evacuation .............................................................

X X X X 

8. Postflight Procedures 

8.a. ...........

After-Landing 

Procedures .........................................................

X X X X 

8.b. ...........

Parking 

and 

Securing ...............................................................

X X X X 

‘‘A’’—indicates that the system, task, or procedure may be examined if the appropriate aircraft system or control is simulated in 

the FSTD and is working properly. 

‘‘R’’—indicates that the simulator may be qualified for this task for continuing qualification training. 
‘‘X’’—indicates that the simulator must be able to perform this task for this level of qualification. 

T

ABLE

A1C—T

ABLE OF

S

IMULATOR

S

YSTEM

T

ASKS

 

QPS requirements 

Information 

Entry No. 

Subjective requirements 

In order to be qualified at the simulator qualification level indi-

cated, the simulator must be able to perform at least the 

tasks associated with that level of qualification. 

Simulator levels 

Notes 

A B C D 

1. Instructor Operating Station (IOS), as appropriate 

1.a. ...........

Power 

switch(es) .......................................................................

X X X X 

1.b. ...........

Airplane conditions ....................................................................

e.g., GW, CG, Fuel loading 

and Systems. 

1.c. ...........

Airports/Runways ......................................................................

X X X X e.g., 

Selection, 

Surface, 

Presets, Lighting controls. 

1.d. ...........

Environmental 

controls .............................................................

X X X X e.g., 

Clouds, 

Visibility, RVR, 

Temp, Wind, Ice, Snow, 
Rain, and Windshear. 

1.e. ...........

Airplane system malfunctions (Insertion/deletion) ....................

1.f. ............

Locks, Freezes, and Repositioning ..........................................

2. Sound Controls 

2.a. ...........

On/off/adjustment ......................................................................

X X X X 

3. Motion/Control Loading System 

3.a. ...........

On/off/emergency 

stop ..............................................................

X X X X 

4. Observer Seats/Stations 

4.a. ...........

Position/Adjustment/Positive restraint system ..........................

A

TTACHMENT

TO

A

PPENDIX

TO

P

ART

60— 

FFS O

BJECTIVE

T

ESTS

 

T

ABLE OF

C

ONTENTS

 

Paragraph No. 

Title 

1. ....................

Introduction. 

2. ....................

Test Requirements. 

T

ABLE OF

C

ONTENTS

—Continued 

Paragraph No. 

Title 

Table A2A, Objective Tests. 

3. ....................

General. 

4. ....................

Control Dynamics. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00059

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

50 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

T

ABLE OF

C

ONTENTS

—Continued 

Paragraph No. 

Title 

5. ....................

Ground Effect. 

6. ....................

Motion System. 

7. ....................

Sound System. 

8. ....................

Additional Information About Flight Simulator 

Qualification for New or Derivative Air-
planes. 

9. ....................

Engineering Simulator—Validation Data. 

10. ..................

[Reserved] 

11. ..................

Validation Test Tolerances. 

12. ..................

Validation Data Roadmap. 

13. ..................

Acceptance Guidelines for Alternative En-

gines Data. 

14. ..................

Acceptance Guidelines for Alternative Avi-

onics (Flight-Related Computers and Con-
trollers). 

15. ..................

Transport Delay Testing. 

16. ..................

Continuing Qualification Evaluations—Vali-

dation Test Data Presentation. 

17. ..................

Alternative Data Sources, Procedures, and 

Instrumentation: Level A and Level B Sim-
ulators Only. 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

1. I

NTRODUCTION

 

a. For the purposes of this attachment, the 

flight conditions specified in the Flight Con-
ditions Column of Table A2A of this appen-
dix, are defined as follows: 

(1) Ground—on ground, independent of air-

plane configuration; 

(2) Take-off—gear down with flaps/slats in 

any certified takeoff position; 

(3) First segment climb—gear down with 

flaps/slats in any certified takeoff position 
(normally not above 50 ft AGL); 

(4) Second segment climb—gear up with 

flaps/slats in any certified takeoff position 
(normally between 50 ft and 400 ft AGL); 

(5) Clean—flaps/slats retracted and gear up; 
(6) Cruise—clean configuration at cruise 

altitude and airspeed; 

(7) Approach—gear up or down with flaps/ 

slats at any normal approach position as rec-
ommended by the airplane manufacturer; 
and 

(8) Landing—gear down with flaps/slats in 

any certified landing position. 

b. The format for numbering the objective 

tests in Appendix A, Attachment 2, Table 
A2A, and the objective tests in Appendix B, 
Attachment 2, Table B2A, is identical. How-
ever, each test required for FFSs is not nec-
essarily required for FTDs. Also, each test 

required for FTDs is not necessarily required 
for FFSs. Therefore, when a test number (or 
series of numbers) is not required, the term 
‘‘Reserved’’ is used in the table at that loca-
tion. Following this numbering format pro-
vides a degree of commonality between the 
two tables and substantially reduces the po-
tential for confusion when referring to objec-
tive test numbers for either FFSs or FTDs. 

c. The reader is encouraged to review the 

Airplane Flight Simulator Evaluation Hand-
book, Volumes I and II, published by the 
Royal Aeronautical Society, London, UK, 
and AC 25–7, as amended, Flight Test Guide 
for Certification of Transport Category Air-
planes, and AC 23–8, as amended, Flight Test 
Guide for Certification of Part 23 Airplanes, 
for references and examples regarding flight 
testing requirements and techniques. 

d. If relevant winds are present in the ob-

jective data, the wind vector should be clear-
ly noted as part of the data presentation, ex-
pressed in conventional terminology, and re-
lated to the runway being used for the test. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

2. T

EST

R

EQUIREMENTS

 

a. The ground and flight tests required for 

qualification are listed in Table A2A, FFS 
Objective Tests. Computer generated simu-
lator test results must be provided for each 
test except where an alternative test is spe-
cifically authorized by the responsible Flight 
Standards office. If a flight condition or op-
erating condition is required for the test but 
does not apply to the airplane being simu-
lated or to the qualification level sought, it 
may be disregarded (e.g., an engine out 
missed approach for a single-engine airplane 
or a maneuver using reverse thrust for an 
airplane without reverse thrust capability). 
Each test result is compared against the val-
idation data described in § 60.13 and in this 
appendix. Although use of a driver program 
designed to automatically accomplish the 
tests is encouraged for all simulators and re-
quired for Level C and Level D simulators, it 
must be possible to conduct each test manu-
ally while recording all appropriate param-
eters. The results must be produced on an 
appropriate recording device acceptable to 
the responsible Flight Standards office and 
must include simulator number, date, time, 
conditions, tolerances, and appropriate de-
pendent variables portrayed in comparison 
to the validation data. Time histories are re-
quired unless otherwise indicated in Table 
A2A. All results must be labeled using the 
tolerances and units given. 

b. Table A2A in this attachment sets out 

the test results required, including the pa-
rameters, tolerances, and flight conditions 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00060

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

51 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

for simulator validation. Tolerances are pro-
vided for the listed tests because mathe-
matical modeling and acquisition and devel-
opment of reference data are often inexact. 
All tolerances listed in the following tables 
are applied to simulator performance. When 
two tolerance values are given for a param-
eter, the less restrictive may be used unless 
otherwise indicated. In those cases where a 
tolerance is expressed only as a percentage, 
the tolerance percentage applies to the max-
imum value of that parameter within its 
normal operating range as measured from 
the neutral or zero position unless otherwise 
indicated. 

c. Certain tests included in this attach-

ment must be supported with an SOC. In 
Table A2A, requirements for SOCs are indi-
cated in the ‘‘Test Details’’ column. 

d. When operational or engineering judg-

ment is used in making assessments for 
flight test data applications for simulator 
validity, such judgment must not be limited 
to a single parameter. For example, data 
that exhibit rapid variations of the measured 
parameters may require interpolations or a 
‘‘best fit’’ data selection. All relevant param-
eters related to a given maneuver or flight 
condition must be provided to allow overall 
interpretation. When it is difficult or impos-
sible to match simulator to airplane data 
throughout a time history, differences must 
be justified by providing a comparison of 
other related variables for the condition 
being assessed. 

e. It is not acceptable to program the FFS 

so that the mathematical modeling is cor-
rect only at the validation test points. Un-
less otherwise noted, simulator tests must 
represent airplane performance and handling 
qualities at operating weights and centers of 
gravity (CG) typical of normal operation. 
Simulator tests at extreme weight or CG 
conditions may be acceptable where required 
for concurrent aircraft certification testing. 
Tests of handling qualities must include val-
idation of augmentation devices. 

f. When comparing the parameters listed to 

those of the airplane, sufficient data must 
also be provided to verify the correct flight 
condition and airplane configuration 
changes. For example, to show that control 
force is within the parameters for a static 
stability test, data to show the correct air-
speed, power, thrust or torque, airplane con-
figuration, altitude, and other appropriate 
datum identification parameters must also 
be given. If comparing short period dynam-
ics, normal acceleration may be used to es-
tablish a match to the airplane, but airspeed, 
altitude, control input, airplane configura-
tion, and other appropriate data must also 
be given. If comparing landing gear change 
dynamics, pitch, airspeed, and altitude may 
be used to establish a match to the airplane, 
but landing gear position must also be pro-
vided. All airspeed values must be properly 

annotated (e.g., indicated versus calibrated). 
In addition, the same variables must be used 
for comparison (e.g., compare inches to 
inches rather than inches to centimeters). 

g. The QTG provided by the sponsor must 

clearly describe how the simulator will be 
set up and operated for each test. Each simu-
lator subsystem may be tested independ-
ently, but overall integrated testing of the 
simulator must be accomplished to assure 
that the total simulator system meets the 
prescribed standards. A manual test proce-
dure with explicit and detailed steps for 
completing each test must also be provided. 

h. For previously qualified simulators, the 

tests and tolerances of this attachment may 
be used in subsequent continuing qualifica-
tion evaluations for any given test if the 
sponsor has submitted a proposed MQTG re-
vision to the responsible Flight Standards 
office and has received responsible Flight 
Standards office approval. 

i. Simulators are evaluated and qualified 

with an engine model simulating the air-
plane data supplier’s flight test engine. For 
qualification of alternative engine models 
(either variations of the flight test engines 
or other manufacturer’s engines) additional 
tests with the alternative engine models 
may be required. This attachment contains 
guidelines for alternative engines. 

j. For testing Computer Controlled Air-

craft (CCA) simulators, or other highly aug-
mented airplane simulators, flight test data 
is required for the Normal (N) and/or Non- 
normal (NN) control states, as indicated in 
this attachment. Where test results are inde-
pendent of control state, Normal or Non-nor-
mal control data may be used. All tests in 
Table A2A require test results in the Normal 
control state unless specifically noted other-
wise in the Test Details section following the 
CCA designation. The responsible Flight 
Standards office will determine what tests 
are appropriate for airplane simulation data. 
When making this determination, the re-
sponsible Flight Standards office may re-
quire other levels of control state degrada-
tion for specific airplane tests. Where Non- 
normal control states are required, test data 
must be provided for one or more Non-nor-
mal control states, and must include the 
least augmented state. Where applicable, 
flight test data must record Normal and 
Non-normal states for: 

(1) Pilot controller deflections or electroni-

cally generated inputs, including location of 
input; and 

(2) Flight control surface positions unless 

test results are not affected by, or are inde-
pendent of, surface positions. 

k. Tests of handling qualities must include 

validation of augmentation devices. FFSs for 
highly augmented airplanes will be validated 
both in the unaugmented configuration (or 
failure state with the maximum permitted 
degradation in handling qualities) and the 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00061

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

52 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

augmented configuration. Where various lev-
els of handling qualities result from failure 
states, validation of the effect of the failure 
is necessary. Requirements for testing will 
be mutually agreed to between the sponsor 
and the responsible Flight Standards office 
on a case-by-case basis. 

l. Some tests will not be required for air-

planes using airplane hardware in the simu-
lator flight deck (e.g., ‘‘side stick con-
troller’’). These exceptions are noted in Sec-
tion 2 ‘‘Handling Qualities’’ in Table A2A of 
this attachment. However, in these cases, 
the sponsor must provide a statement that 
the airplane hardware meets the appropriate 
manufacturer’s specifications and the spon-
sor must have supporting information to 
that fact available for responsible Flight 
Standards office review. 

m. For objective test purposes, see Appen-

dix F of this part for the definitions of ‘‘Near 
maximum,’’ ‘‘Light,’’ and ‘‘Medium’’ gross 
weight. 

E

ND

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

n. In those cases where the objective test 

results authorize a ‘‘snapshot test’’ or a ‘‘se-
ries of snapshot tests’’ results in lieu of a 
time-history result, the sponsor or other 
data provider must ensure that a steady 
state condition exists at the instant of time 
captured by the ‘‘snapshot.’’ The steady 
state condition should exist from 4 seconds 
prior to, through 1 second following, the in-
stant of time captured by the snap shot. 

o. For references on basic operating 

weight, see AC 120–27, ‘‘Aircraft Weight and 
Balance;’’ and FAA–H–8083–1, ‘‘Aircraft 
Weight and Balance Handbook.’’ 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00062

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

53 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00063

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.017</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

54 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00064

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.018</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

55 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00065

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.019</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

56 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00066

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.020</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

57 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00067

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.021</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

58 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00068

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.022</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

59 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00069

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.023</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

60 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00070

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.024</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

61 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00071

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.025</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

62 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00072

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.026</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

63 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00073

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.027</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

64 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00074

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.028</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

65 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00075

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.029</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

66 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00076

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.030</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

67 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00077

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.031</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

68 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00078

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.032</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

69 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00079

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.033</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

70 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00080

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.034</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

71 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00081

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.035</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

72 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00082

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.036</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

73 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00083

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.037</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

74 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00084

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.038</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

75 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00085

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.039</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

76 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00086

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.040</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

77 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00087

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.041</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

78 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00088

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.042</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

79 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00089

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.043</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

80 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00090

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.044</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

81 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00091

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.045</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

82 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00092

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.046</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

83 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00093

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.047</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

84 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00094

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.048</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

85 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00095

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.049</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

86 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

3. G

ENERAL

 

a. If relevant winds are present in the ob-

jective data, the wind vector should be clear-
ly noted as part of the data presentation, ex-
pressed in conventional terminology, and re-

lated to the runway being used for test near 
the ground. 

b. The reader is encouraged to review the 

Airplane Flight Simulator Evaluation Hand-
book, Volumes I and II, published by the 
Royal Aeronautical Society, London, UK, 
and AC 25–7, as amended, Flight Test Guide 
for Certification of Transport Category Air-
planes, and AC 23–8, as amended, Flight Test 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00096

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.050</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

87 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

Guide for Certification of Part 23 Airplanes, 
for references and examples regarding flight 
testing requirements and techniques. 

4. C

ONTROL

D

YNAMICS

 

a. General. The characteristics of an air-

plane flight control system have a major ef-
fect on handling qualities. A significant con-
sideration in pilot acceptability of an air-
plane is the ‘‘feel’’ provided through the 
flight controls. Considerable effort is ex-
pended on airplane feel system design so that 
pilots will be comfortable and will consider 
the airplane desirable to fly. In order for an 
FFS to be representative, it should ‘‘feel’’ 
like the airplane being simulated. Compli-
ance with this requirement is determined by 
comparing a recording of the control feel dy-
namics of the FFS to actual airplane meas-
urements in the takeoff, cruise and landing 
configurations. 

(1) Recordings such as free response to an 

impulse or step function are classically used 
to estimate the dynamic properties of 
electromechanical systems. In any case, it is 
only possible to estimate the dynamic prop-
erties as a result of being able to estimate 
true inputs and responses. Therefore, it is 
imperative that the best possible data be col-
lected since close matching of the FFS con-
trol loading system to the airplane system is 
essential. The required dynamic control 
tests are described in Table A2A of this at-
tachment. 

(2) For initial and upgrade evaluations, the 

QPS requires that control dynamics charac-
teristics be measured and recorded directly 
from the flight controls (Handling Quali-
ties—Table A2A). This procedure is usually 
accomplished by measuring the free response 
of the controls using a step or impulse input 
to excite the system. The procedure should 
be accomplished in the takeoff, cruise and 
landing flight conditions and configurations. 

(3) For airplanes with irreversible control 

systems, measurements may be obtained on 
the ground if proper pitot-static inputs are 
provided to represent airspeeds typical of 
those encountered in flight. Likewise, it may 
be shown that for some airplanes, takeoff, 
cruise, and landing configurations have like 
effects. Thus, one may suffice for another. In 
either case, engineering validation or air-
plane manufacturer rationale should be sub-
mitted as justification for ground tests or for 
eliminating a configuration. For FFSs re-
quiring static and dynamic tests at the con-
trols, special test fixtures will not be re-
quired during initial and upgrade evalua-
tions if the QTG shows both test fixture re-
sults and the results of an alternate ap-
proach (e.g., computer plots that were pro-
duced concurrently and show satisfactory 
agreement). Repeat of the alternate method 
during the initial evaluation satisfies this 
test requirement. 

b. Control Dynamics Evaluation. The dy-

namic properties of control systems are 
often stated in terms of frequency, damping 
and a number of other classical measure-
ments. In order to establish a consistent 
means of validating test results for FFS con-
trol loading, criteria are needed that will 
clearly define the measurement interpreta-
tion and the applied tolerances. Criteria are 
needed for underdamped, critically damped 
and overdamped systems. In the case of an 
underdamped system with very light damp-
ing, the system may be quantified in terms 
of frequency and damping. In critically 
damped or overdamped systems, the fre-
quency and damping are not readily meas-
ured from a response time history. There-
fore, the following suggested measurements 
may be used: 

(1) For Level C and D simulators. Tests to 

verify that control feel dynamics represent 
the airplane should show that the dynamic 
damping cycles (free response of the con-
trols) match those of the airplane within 
specified tolerances. The Flight Standards 
Service recognizes that several different 
testing methods may be used to verify the 
control feel dynamic response. The respon-
sible Flight Standards office will consider 
the merits of testing methods based on reli-
ability and consistency. One acceptable 
method of evaluating the response and the 
tolerance to be applied is described below for 
the underdamped and critically damped 
cases. A sponsor using this method to com-
ply with the QPS requirements should per-
form the tests as follows: 

(a) Underdamped response. Two measure-

ments are required for the period, the time 
to first zero crossing (in case a rate limit is 
present) and the subsequent frequency of os-
cillation. It is necessary to measure cycles 
on an individual basis in case there are non- 
uniform periods in the response. Each period 
will be independently compared to the re-
spective period of the airplane control sys-
tem and, consequently, will enjoy the full 
tolerance specified for that period. The 
damping tolerance will be applied to over-
shoots on an individual basis. Care should be 
taken when applying the tolerance to small 
overshoots since the significance of such 
overshoots becomes questionable. Only those 
overshoots larger than 5 per cent of the total 
initial displacement should be considered. 
The residual band, labeled T(A

d

) on Figure 

A2A is 

±

5 percent of the initial displacement 

amplitude A

d

from the steady state value of 

the oscillation. Only oscillations outside the 
residual band are considered significant. 
When comparing FFS data to airplane data, 
the process should begin by overlaying or 
aligning the FFS and airplane steady state 
values and then comparing amplitudes of os-
cillation peaks, the time of the first zero 
crossing and individual periods of oscilla-
tion. The FFS should show the same number 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00097

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

88 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

of significant overshoots to within one when 
compared against the airplane data. The pro-
cedure for evaluating the response is illus-
trated in Figure A2A. 

(b) Critically damped and overdamped re-

sponse. Due to the nature of critically 
damped and overdamped responses (no over-
shoots), the time to reach 90 percent of the 
steady state (neutral point) value should be 
the same as the airplane within 

±

10 percent. 

Figure A2B illustrates the procedure. 

(c) Special considerations. Control systems 

that exhibit characteristics other than clas-
sical overdamped or underdamped responses 
should meet specified tolerances. In addi-
tion, special consideration should be given to 
ensure that significant trends are main-
tained. 

(2) Tolerances. 
(a) The following table summarizes the tol-

erances, T, for underdamped systems, and 
‘‘n’’ is the sequential period of a full cycle of 
oscillation. See Figure A2A of this attach-
ment for an illustration of the referenced 
measurements. 

T(P

0

) ..........

±

10% of P

0

T(P

1

) ..........

±

20% of P

1

T(P

2

) ..........

±

30% of P

2

T(P

n

) ..........

±

10(n + 1)% of P

n

T(A

n

) ..........

±

10% of A

1

T(A

d

) ..........

±

5% of A

d

= residual 

band. 

Significant overshoots, First overshoot 

and 

±

1 subsequent overshoots. 

(b) The following tolerance applies to criti-

cally damped and overdamped systems only. 
See Figure A2B for an illustration of the ref-
erence measurements: 

T(P

0

) ..........

±

10% of P

0

 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

QPS R

EQUIREMENT

 

c. Alternative method for control dynam-

ics evaluation. 

(1) An alternative means for validating 

control dynamics for aircraft with hydrau-
lically powered flight controls and artificial 
feel systems is by the measurement of con-
trol force and rate of movement. For each 
axis of pitch, roll, and yaw, the control must 
be forced to its maximum extreme position 
for the following distinct rates. These tests 
are conducted under normal flight and 
ground conditions. 

(a) Static test—Slowly move the control so 

that a full sweep is achieved within 95 to 105 
seconds. A full sweep is defined as movement 
of the controller from neutral to the stop, 
usually aft or right stop, then to the oppo-
site stop, then to the neutral position. 

(b) Slow dynamic test—Achieve a full 

sweep within 8–12 seconds. 

(c) Fast dynamic test—Achieve a full 

sweep within 3–5 seconds. 

N

OTE

: Dynamic sweeps may be limited to 

forces not exceeding 100 lbs. (44.5 daN). 

(d) Tolerances 

(i) Static test; see Table A2A, FFS Objec-

tive Tests, Entries 2.a.1., 2.a.2., and 2.a.3. 

(ii) Dynamic test—

±

2 lbs (0.9 daN) or 

±

10% 

on dynamic increment above static test. 

E

ND

QPS R

EQUIREMENT

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

d. The FAA is open to alternative means 

such as the one described above. The alter-
natives should be justified and appropriate 
to the application. For example, the method 
described here may not apply to all manufac-
turers’ systems and certainly not to aircraft 
with reversible control systems. Each case is 
considered on its own merit on an ad hoc 
basis. If the FAA finds that alternative 
methods do not result in satisfactory per-
formance, more conventionally accepted 
methods will have to be used. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00098

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

89 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00099

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09MY08.000</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

90 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

5. G

ROUND

E

FFECT

 

a. For an FFS to be used for take-off and 

landing (not applicable to Level A simula-
tors in that the landing maneuver may not 
be credited in a Level A simulator) it should 
reproduce the aerodynamic changes that 
occur in ground effect. The parameters cho-
sen for FFS validation should indicate these 
changes. 

(1) A dedicated test should be provided that 

will validate the aerodynamic ground effect 
characteristics. 

(2) The organization performing the flight 

tests may select appropriate test methods 
and procedures to validate ground effect. 
However, the flight tests should be per-
formed with enough duration near the 
ground to sufficiently validate the ground- 
effect model. 

b. The responsible Flight Standards office 

will consider the merits of testing methods 
based on reliability and consistency. Accept-
able methods of validating ground effect are 
described below. If other methods are pro-
posed, rationale should be provided to con-
clude that the tests performed validate the 
ground-effect model. A sponsor using the 

methods described below to comply with the 
QPS requirements should perform the tests 
as follows: 

(1) Level fly-bys. The level fly-bys should 

be conducted at a minimum of three alti-
tudes within the ground effect, including one 
at no more than 10% of the wingspan above 
the ground, one each at approximately 30% 
and 50% of the wingspan where height refers 
to main gear tire above the ground. In addi-
tion, one level-flight trim condition should 
be conducted out of ground effect (e.g., at 
150% of wingspan). 

(2) Shallow approach landing. The shallow 

approach landing should be performed at a 
glide slope of approximately one degree with 
negligible pilot activity until flare. 

c. The lateral-directional characteristics 

are also altered by ground effect. For exam-
ple, because of changes in lift, roll damping 
is affected. The change in roll damping will 
affect other dynamic modes usually evalu-
ated for FFS validation. In fact, Dutch roll 
dynamics, spiral stability, and roll-rate for a 
given lateral control input are altered by 
ground effect. Steady heading sideslips will 
also be affected. These effects should be ac-
counted for in the FFS modeling. Several 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00100

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09MY08.001</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

91 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

tests such as crosswind landing, one engine 
inoperative landing, and engine failure on 
take-off serve to validate lateral-directional 
ground effect since portions of these tests 
are accomplished as the aircraft is descend-
ing through heights above the runway at 
which ground effect is an important factor. 

6. M

OTION

S

YSTEM

 

a. General. 
(1) Pilots use continuous information sig-

nals to regulate the state of the airplane. In 
concert with the instruments and outside- 
world visual information, whole-body motion 
feedback is essential in assisting the pilot to 
control the airplane dynamics, particularly 
in the presence of external disturbances. The 
motion system should meet basic objective 
performance criteria, and should be subjec-
tively tuned at the pilot’s seat position to 
represent the linear and angular accelera-
tions of the airplane during a prescribed 
minimum set of maneuvers and conditions. 
The response of the motion cueing system 
should also be repeatable. 

(2) The Motion System tests in Section 3 of 

Table A2A are intended to qualify the FFS 
motion cueing system from a mechanical 
performance standpoint. Additionally, the 
list of motion effects provides a representa-
tive sample of dynamic conditions that 
should be present in the flight simulator. An 
additional list of representative, training- 
critical maneuvers, selected from Section 1 
(Performance tests), and Section 2 (Handling 
Qualities tests), in Table A2A, that should be 
recorded during initial qualification (but 
without tolerance) to indicate the flight sim-
ulator motion cueing performance signature 
have been identified (reference Section 3.e). 
These tests are intended to help improve the 
overall standard of FFS motion cueing. 

b. Motion System Checks. The intent of 

test 3a, Frequency Response, and test 3b, 
Turn-Around Check, as described in the 
Table of Objective Tests, are to demonstrate 
the performance of the motion system hard-
ware, and to check the integrity of the mo-
tion set-up with regard to calibration and 
wear. These tests are independent of the mo-
tion cueing software and should be consid-
ered robotic tests. 

c. Motion System Repeatability. The in-

tent of this test is to ensure that the motion 
system software and motion system hard-
ware have not degraded or changed over 
time. This diagnostic test should be com-
pleted during continuing qualification 
checks in lieu of the robotic tests. This will 
allow an improved ability to determine 
changes in the software or determine deg-
radation in the hardware. The following in-
formation delineates the methodology that 
should be used for this test. 

(1) Input: The inputs should be such that 

rotational accelerations, rotational rates, 
and linear accelerations are inserted before 

the transfer from airplane center of gravity 
to pilot reference point with a minimum am-
plitude of 5 deg/sec/sec, 10 deg/sec and 0.3 g, 
respectively, to provide adequate analysis of 
the output. 

(2) Recommended output: 
(a) Actual platform linear accelerations; 

the output will comprise accelerations due 
to both the linear and rotational motion ac-
celeration; 

(b) Motion actuators position. 
d. Objective Motion Cueing Test—Fre-

quency Domain 

(1) Background. This test quantifies the re-

sponse of the motion cueing system from the 
output of the flight model to the motion 
platform response. Other motion tests, such 
as the motion system frequency response, 
concentrate on the mechanical performance 
of the motion system hardware alone. The 
intent of this test is to provide quantitative 
frequency response records of the entire mo-
tion system for specified degree-of-freedom 
transfer relationships over a range of fre-
quencies. This range should be representa-
tive of the manual control range for that 
particular aircraft type and the simulator as 
set up during qualification. The measure-
ments of this test should include the com-
bined influence of the motion cueing algo-
rithm, the motion platform dynamics, and 
the transport delay associated with the mo-
tion cueing and control system implementa-
tion. Specified frequency responses describ-
ing the ability of the FSTD to reproduce air-
craft translations and rotations, as well as 
the cross-coupling relations, are required as 
part of these measurements. When simu-
lating forward aircraft acceleration, the sim-
ulator is accelerated momentarily in the for-
ward direction to provide the onset cueing. 
This is considered the direct transfer rela-
tion. The simulator is simultaneously tilted 
nose-up due to the low-pass filter in order to 
generate a sustained specific force. The tilt 
associated with the generation of the sus-
tained specific force, and the angular rates 
and angular accelerations associated with 
the initiation of the sustained specific force, 
are considered cross-coupling relations. The 
specific force is required for the perception 
of the aircraft sustained specific force, while 
the angular rates and accelerations do not 
occur in the aircraft and should be mini-
mized. 

(2) Frequency response test. This test re-

quires the frequency response to be measured 
for the motion cueing system. Reference si-
nusoidal signals are inserted at the pilot ref-
erence position prior to the motion cueing 
computations. The response of the motion 
platform in the corresponding degree-of-free-
dom (the direct transfer relations), as well as 
the motions resulting from cross-coupling 
(the cross-coupling relations), are recorded. 
These are the tests that are important to 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00101

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

92 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

pilot motion cueing and are general tests ap-
plicable to all types of airplanes. 

(3) This test is only required to be run once 

for the initial qualification of the FSTD and 
will not be required for continuing qualifica-
tion purposes. The FAA will accept test re-
sults provided by the FSTD manufacturer as 
part of a Statement of Compliance con-
firming that the objective motion cueing 
tests were used to assist in the tuning of the 
FSTD’s motion cueing algorithms. 

e. Motion Vibrations. 
(1) Presentation of results. The char-

acteristic motion vibrations may be used to 
verify that the flight simulator can repro-
duce the frequency content of the airplane 
when flown in specific conditions. The test 
results should be presented as a Power Spec-
tral Density (PSD) plot with frequencies on 
the horizontal axis and amplitude on the 
vertical axis. The airplane data and flight 
simulator data should be presented in the 
same format with the same scaling. The al-
gorithms used for generating the flight simu-
lator data should be the same as those used 
for the airplane data. If they are not the 
same then the algorithms used for the flight 
simulator data should be proven to be suffi-
ciently comparable. As a minimum, the re-
sults along the dominant axes should be pre-
sented and a rationale for not presenting the 
other axes should be provided. 

(2) Interpretation of results. The overall 

trend of the PSD plot should be considered 
while focusing on the dominant frequencies. 
Less emphasis should be placed on the dif-
ferences at the high frequency and low am-
plitude portions of the PSD plot. During the 
analysis, certain structural components of 
the flight simulator have resonant fre-
quencies that are filtered and may not ap-
pear in the PSD plot. If filtering is required, 
the notch filter bandwidth should be limited 
to 1 Hz to ensure that the buffet feel is not 
adversely affected. In addition, a rationale 
should be provided to explain that the char-
acteristic motion vibration is not being ad-
versely affected by the filtering. The ampli-
tude should match airplane data as described 
below. However, if the PSD plot was altered 
for subjective reasons, a rationale should be 
provided to justify the change. If the plot is 
on a logarithmic scale, it may be difficult to 
interpret the amplitude of the buffet in 
terms of acceleration. For example, a 1 

× 

10

¥

3

g-rms

2

/Hz would describe a heavy buffet 

and may be seen in the deep stall regime. Al-
ternatively, a 1 

× 

10

¥

6

g-rms

2

/Hz buffet is al-

most not perceivable; but may represent a 
flap buffet at low speed. The previous two ex-
amples differ in magnitude by 1000. On a PSD 
plot this represents three decades (one dec-
ade is a change in order of magnitude of 10; 
and two decades is a change in order of mag-
nitude of 100). 

N

OTE

: In the example, ‘‘g-rms

2

is the math-

ematical expression for ‘‘g’s root mean 
squared.’’ 

7. S

OUND

S

YSTEM

 

a. General. The total sound environment in 

the airplane is very complex, and changes 
with atmospheric conditions, airplane con-
figuration, airspeed, altitude, and power set-
tings. Flight deck sounds are an important 
component of the flight deck operational en-
vironment and provide valuable information 
to the flight crew. These aural cues can ei-
ther assist the crew (as an indication of an 
abnormal situation), or hinder the crew (as a 
distraction or nuisance). For effective train-
ing, the flight simulator should provide 
flight deck sounds that are perceptible to the 
pilot during normal and abnormal oper-
ations, and comparable to those of the air-
plane. The flight simulator operator should 
carefully evaluate background noises in the 
location where the device will be installed. 
To demonstrate compliance with the sound 
requirements, the objective or validation 
tests in this attachment were selected to 
provide a representative sample of normal 
static conditions typically experienced by a 
pilot. 

b. Alternate propulsion. For FFS with 

multiple propulsion configurations, any con-
dition listed in Table A2A of this attachment 
should be presented for evaluation as part of 
the QTG if identified by the airplane manu-
facturer or other data supplier as signifi-
cantly different due to a change in propul-
sion system (engine or propeller). 

c. Data and Data Collection System. 
(1) Information provided to the flight simu-

lator manufacturer should be presented in 
the format suggested by the International 
Air Transport Association (IATA) ‘‘Flight 
Simulator Design and Performance Data Re-
quirements,’’ as amended. This information 
should contain calibration and frequency re-
sponse data. 

(2) The system used to perform the tests 

listed in Table A2A should comply with the 
following standards: 

(a) The specifications for octave, half oc-

tave, and third octave band filter sets may 
be found in American National Standards In-
stitute (ANSI) S1.11–1986; 

(b) Measurement microphones should be 

type WS2 or better, as described in Inter-
national Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 
1094–4–1995. 

(3) Headsets. If headsets are used during 

normal operation of the airplane they should 
also be used during the flight simulator eval-
uation. 

(4) Playback equipment. Playback equip-

ment and recordings of the QTG conditions 
should be provided during initial evalua-
tions. 

(5) Background noise. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00102

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

93 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

(a) Background noise is the noise in the 

flight simulator that is not associated with 
the airplane, but is caused by the flight sim-
ulator’s cooling and hydraulic systems and 
extraneous noise from other locations in the 
building. Background noise can seriously im-
pact the correct simulation of airplane 
sounds and should be kept below the airplane 
sounds. In some cases, the sound level of the 
simulation can be increased to compensate 
for the background noise. However, this ap-
proach is limited by the specified tolerances 
and by the subjective acceptability of the 
sound environment to the evaluation pilot. 

(b) The acceptability of the background 

noise levels is dependent upon the normal 
sound levels in the airplane being rep-
resented. Background noise levels that fall 
below the lines defined by the following 
points, may be acceptable: 

(i) 70 dB @ 50 Hz; 
(ii) 55 dB @ 1000 Hz; 
(iii) 30 dB @ 16 kHz 
(N

OTE

: These limits are for unweighted 

1

3

 

octave band sound levels. Meeting these lim-
its for background noise does not ensure an 
acceptable flight simulator. Airplane sounds 
that fall below this limit require careful re-
view and may require lower limits on back-
ground noise.) 

(6) Validation testing. Deficiencies in air-

plane recordings should be considered when 
applying the specified tolerances to ensure 
that the simulation is representative of the 
airplane. Examples of typical deficiencies 
are: 

(a) Variation of data between tail numbers; 
(b) Frequency response of microphones; 
(c) Repeatability of the measurements. 

T

ABLE

A2B—E

XAMPLE OF

C

ONTINUING

Q

UALI

-

FICATION

F

REQUENCY

R

ESPONSE

T

EST

T

OL

-

ERANCE

 

Band center 

frequency 

Initial results 

(dBSPL) 

Continuing 

qualification 

results 

(dBSPL) 

Absolute 

difference 

50 .....................

75.0 73.8 1.2 

63 .....................

75.9 75.6 0.3 

80 .....................

77.1 76.5 0.6 

100 ...................

78.0 78.3 0.3 

125 ...................

81.9 81.3 0.6 

160 ...................

79.8 80.1 0.3 

200 ...................

83.1 84.9 1.8 

250 ...................

78.6 78.9 0.3 

315 ...................

79.5 78.3 1.2 

400 ...................

80.1 79.5 0.6 

500 ...................

80.7 79.8 0.9 

630 ...................

81.9 80.4 1.5 

800 ...................

73.2 74.1 0.9 

1000 .................

79.2 80.1 0.9 

1250 .................

80.7 82.8 2.1 

1600 .................

81.6 78.6 3.0 

2000 .................

76.2 74.4 1.8 

2500 .................

79.5 80.7 1.2 

3150 .................

80.1 77.1 3.0 

4000 .................

78.9 78.6 0.3 

5000 .................

80.1 77.1 3.0 

T

ABLE

A2B—E

XAMPLE OF

C

ONTINUING

Q

UALI

-

FICATION

F

REQUENCY

R

ESPONSE

T

EST

T

OL

-

ERANCE

—Continued 

Band center 

frequency 

Initial results 

(dBSPL) 

Continuing 

qualification 

results 

(dBSPL) 

Absolute 

difference 

6300 .................

80.7 80.4 0.3 

8000 .................

84.3 85.5 1.2 

10000 ...............

81.3 79.8 1.5 

12500 ...............

80.7 80.1 0.6 

16000 ...............

71.1 71.1 0.0 

Average ....

....................

......................

1.1 

8. A

DDITIONAL

I

NFORMATION

A

BOUT

F

LIGHT

 

S

IMULATOR

Q

UALIFICATION FOR

N

EW OR

D

E

-

RIVATIVE

A

IRPLANES

 

a. Typically, an airplane manufacturer’s 

approved final data for performance, han-
dling qualities, systems or avionics is not 
available until well after a new or derivative 
airplane has entered service. However, flight 
crew training and certification often begins 
several months prior to the entry of the first 
airplane into service. Consequently, it may 
be necessary to use preliminary data pro-
vided by the airplane manufacturer for in-
terim qualification of flight simulators. 

b. In these cases, the responsible Flight 

Standards office may accept certain par-
tially validated preliminary airplane and 
systems data, and early release (‘‘red label’’) 
avionics data in order to permit the nec-
essary program schedule for training, certifi-
cation, and service introduction. 

c. Simulator sponsors seeking qualifica-

tion based on preliminary data should con-
sult the responsible Flight Standards office 
to make special arrangements for using pre-
liminary data for flight simulator qualifica-
tion. The sponsor should also consult the air-
plane and flight simulator manufacturers to 
develop a data plan and flight simulator 
qualification plan. 

d. The procedure to be followed to gain the 

responsible Flight Standards office accept-
ance of preliminary data will vary from case 
to case and between airplane manufacturers. 
Each airplane manufacturer’s new airplane 
development and test program is designed to 
suit the needs of the particular project and 
may not contain the same events or se-
quence of events as another manufacturer’s 
program, or even the same manufacturer’s 
program for a different airplane. Therefore, 
there cannot be a prescribed invariable pro-
cedure for acceptance of preliminary data, 
but instead there should be a statement de-
scribing the final sequence of events, data 
sources, and validation procedures agreed by 
the simulator sponsor, the airplane manufac-
turer, the flight simulator manufacturer, 
and the responsible Flight Standards office. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00103

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

94 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

N

OTE

: A description of airplane manufac-

turer-provided data needed for flight simu-
lator modeling and validation is to be found 
in the IATA Document ‘‘Flight Simulator 
Design and Performance Data Require-
ments,’’ as amended. 

e. The preliminary data should be the man-

ufacturer’s best representation of the air-
plane, with assurance that the final data will 
not significantly deviate from the prelimi-
nary estimates. Data derived from these pre-
dictive or preliminary techniques should be 
validated against available sources includ-
ing, at least, the following: 

(1) Manufacturer’s engineering report. The 

report should explain the predictive method 
used and illustrate past success of the meth-
od on similar projects. For example, the 
manufacturer could show the application of 
the method to an earlier airplane model or 
predict the characteristics of an earlier 
model and compare the results to final data 
for that model. 

(2) Early flight test results. This data is 

often derived from airplane certification 
tests, and should be used to maximum ad-
vantage for early flight simulator valida-
tion. Certain critical tests that would nor-
mally be done early in the airplane certifi-
cation program should be included to vali-
date essential pilot training and certifi-
cation maneuvers. These include cases where 
a pilot is expected to cope with an airplane 
failure mode or an engine failure. Flight test 
data that will be available early in the flight 
test program will depend on the airplane 
manufacturer’s flight test program design 
and may not be the same in each case. The 
flight test program of the airplane manufac-
turer should include provisions for genera-
tion of very early flight test results for 
flight simulator validation. 

f. The use of preliminary data is not indefi-

nite. The airplane manufacturer’s final data 
should be available within 12 months after 
the airplane’s first entry into service or as 
agreed by the responsible Flight Standards 
office, the simulator sponsor, and the air-
plane manufacturer. When applying for in-
terim qualification using preliminary data, 
the simulator sponsor and the responsible 
Flight Standards office should agree on the 
update program. This includes specifying 
that the final data update will be installed in 
the flight simulator within a period of 12 
months following the final data release, un-
less special conditions exist and a different 
schedule is acceptable. The flight simulator 
performance and handling validation would 
then be based on data derived from flight 
tests or from other approved sources. Initial 
airplane systems data should be updated 
after engineering tests. Final airplane sys-
tems data should also be used for flight sim-
ulator programming and validation. 

g. Flight simulator avionics should stay 

essentially in step with airplane avionics 

(hardware and software) updates. The per-
mitted time lapse between airplane and 
flight simulator updates should be minimal. 
It may depend on the magnitude of the up-
date and whether the QTG and pilot training 
and certification are affected. Differences in 
airplane and flight simulator avionics 
versions and the resulting effects on flight 
simulator qualification should be agreed be-
tween the simulator sponsor and the respon-
sible Flight Standards office. Consultation 
with the flight simulator manufacturer is de-
sirable throughout the qualification process. 

h. The following describes an example of 

the design data and sources that might be 
used in the development of an interim quali-
fication plan. 

(1) The plan should consist of the develop-

ment of a QTG based upon a mix of flight 
test and engineering simulation data. For 
data collected from specific airplane flight 
tests or other flights, the required design 
model or data changes necessary to support 
an acceptable Proof of Match (POM) should 
be generated by the airplane manufacturer. 

(2) For proper validation of the two sets of 

data, the airplane manufacturer should com-
pare their simulation model responses 
against the flight test data, when driven by 
the same control inputs and subjected to the 
same atmospheric conditions as recorded in 
the flight test. The model responses should 
result from a simulation where the following 
systems are run in an integrated fashion and 
are consistent with the design data released 
to the flight simulator manufacturer: 

(a) Propulsion; 
(b) Aerodynamics; 
(c) Mass properties; 
(d) Flight controls; 
(e) Stability augmentation; and 
(f) Brakes/landing gear. 
i. A qualified test pilot should be used to 

assess handling qualities and performance 
evaluations for the qualification of flight 
simulators of new airplane types. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

QPS R

EQUIREMENT

 

9. E

NGINEERING

S

IMULATOR

—V

ALIDATION

 

D

ATA

 

a. When a fully validated simulation (i.e., 

validated with flight test results) is modified 
due to changes to the simulated airplane 
configuration, the airplane manufacturer or 
other acceptable data supplier must coordi-
nate with the responsible Flight Standards 
office if they propose to supply validation 
data from an ‘‘audited’’ engineering simu-
lator/simulation to selectively supplement 
flight test data. The responsible Flight 
Standards office must be provided an oppor-
tunity to audit the engineering simulation 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00104

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

95 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

or the engineering simulator used to gen-
erate the validation data. Validation data 
from an audited engineering simulation may 
be used for changes that are incremental in 
nature. Manufacturers or other data sup-
pliers must be able to demonstrate that the 
predicted changes in aircraft performance 
are based on acceptable aeronautical prin-
ciples with proven success history and valid 
outcomes. This must include comparisons of 
predicted and flight test validated data. 

b. Airplane manufacturers or other accept-

able data suppliers seeking to use an engi-
neering simulator for simulation validation 
data as an alternative to flight-test derived 
validation data, must contact the respon-
sible Flight Standards office and provide the 
following: 

(1) A description of the proposed aircraft 

changes, a description of the proposed sim-
ulation model changes, and the use of an in-
tegral configuration management process, 
including a description of the actual simula-
tion model modifications that includes a 
step-by-step description leading from the 
original model(s) to the current model(s). 

(2) A schedule for review by the responsible 

Flight Standards office of the proposed plan 
and the subsequent validation data to estab-
lish acceptability of the proposal. 

(3) Validation data from an audited engi-

neering simulator/simulation to supplement 
specific segments of the flight test data. 

c. To be qualified to supply engineering 

simulator validation data, for aerodynamic, 
engine, flight control, or ground handling 
models, an airplane manufacturer or other 
acceptable data supplier must: 

(1) Be able to verify their ability able to: 
(a) Develop and implement high fidelity 

simulation models; and 

(b) Predict the handling and performance 

characteristics of an airplane with sufficient 
accuracy to avoid additional flight test ac-
tivities for those handling and performance 
characteristics. 

(2) Have an engineering simulator that: 
(a) Is a physical entity, complete with a 

flight deck representative of the simulated 
class of airplane; 

(b) Has controls sufficient for manual 

flight; 

(c) Has models that run in an integrated 

manner; 

(d) Has fully flight-test validated simula-

tion models as the original or baseline sim-
ulation models; 

(e) Has an out-of-the-flight deck visual sys-

tem; 

(f) Has actual avionics boxes interchange-

able with the equivalent software simula-
tions to support validation of released soft-
ware; 

(g) Uses the same models as released to the 

training community (which are also used to 
produce stand-alone proof-of-match and 
checkout documents); 

(h) Is used to support airplane development 

and certification; and 

(i) Has been found to be a high fidelity rep-

resentation of the airplane by the manufac-
turer’s pilots (or other acceptable data sup-
plier), certificate holders, and the respon-
sible Flight Standards office. 

(3) Use the engineering simulator/simula-

tion to produce a representative set of inte-
grated proof-of-match cases. 

(4) Use a configuration control system cov-

ering hardware and software for the oper-
ating components of the engineering simu-
lator/simulation. 

(5) Demonstrate that the predicted effects 

of the change(s) are within the provisions of 
sub-paragraph ‘‘a’’ of this section, and con-
firm that additional flight test data are not 
required. 

d. Additional Requirements for Validation 

Data 

(1) When used to provide validation data, 

an engineering simulator must meet the sim-
ulator standards currently applicable to 
training simulators except for the data pack-
age. 

(2) The data package used must be: 
(a) Comprised of the engineering pre-

dictions derived from the airplane design, de-
velopment, or certification process; 

(b) Based on acceptable aeronautical prin-

ciples with proven success history and valid 
outcomes for aerodynamics, engine oper-
ations, avionics operations, flight control ap-
plications, or ground handling; 

(c) Verified with existing flight-test data; 

and 

(d) Applicable to the configuration of a 

production airplane, as opposed to a flight- 
test airplane. 

(3) Where engineering simulator data are 

used as part of a QTG, an essential match 
must exist between the training simulator 
and the validation data. 

(4) Training flight simulator(s) using these 

baseline and modified simulation models 
must be qualified to at least internationally 
recognized standards, such as contained in 
the ICAO Document 9625, the ‘‘Manual of Cri-
teria for the Qualification of Flight Simula-
tors.’’ 

E

ND

QPS R

EQUIREMENT

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

10. [R

ESERVED

11. V

ALIDATION

T

EST

T

OLERANCES

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

a. Non-Flight-Test Tolerances 
(1) If engineering simulator data or other 

non-flight-test data are used as an allowable 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00105

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

96 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

form of reference validation data for the ob-
jective tests listed in Table A2A of this at-
tachment, the data provider must supply a 
well-documented mathematical model and 
testing procedure that enables a replication 
of the engineering simulation results within 
40% of the corresponding flight test toler-
ances. 

b. Background 
(1) The tolerances listed in Table A2A of 

this attachment are designed to measure the 
quality of the match using flight-test data as 
a reference. 

(2) Good engineering judgment should be 

applied to all tolerances in any test. A test 
is failed when the results clearly fall outside 
of the prescribed tolerance(s). 

(3) Engineering simulator data are accept-

able because the same simulation models 
used to produce the reference data are also 
used to test the flight training simulator 
(i.e., the two sets of results should be ‘‘es-
sentially’’ similar). 

(4) The results from the two sources may 

differ for the following reasons: 

(a) Hardware (avionics units and flight 

controls); 

(b) Iteration rates; 
(c) Execution order; 
(d) Integration methods; 
(e) Processor architecture; 
(f) Digital drift, including: 
(i) Interpolation methods; 
(ii) Data handling differences; and 
(iii) Auto-test trim tolerances. 
(5) The tolerance limit between the ref-

erence data and the flight simulator results 
is generally 40 percent of the corresponding 
‘flight-test’ tolerances. However, there may 
be cases where the simulator models used are 
of higher fidelity, or the manner in which 
they are cascaded in the integrated testing 
loop have the effect of a higher fidelity, than 
those supplied by the data provider. Under 
these circumstances, it is possible that an 
error greater than 40 percent may be gen-
erated. An error greater than 40 percent may 
be acceptable if simulator sponsor can pro-
vide an adequate explanation. 

(6) Guidelines are needed for the applica-

tion of tolerances to engineering-simulator- 
generated validation data because: 

(a) Flight-test data are often not available 

due to technical reasons; 

(b) Alternative technical solutions are 

being advanced; and 

(c) High costs. 

12. V

ALIDATION

D

ATA

R

OADMAP

 

a. Airplane manufacturers or other data 

suppliers should supply a validation data 
roadmap (VDR) document as part of the data 
package. A VDR document contains guid-
ance material from the airplane validation 
data supplier recommending the best pos-
sible sources of data to be used as validation 
data in the QTG. A VDR is of special value 
when requesting interim qualification, quali-
fication of simulators for airplanes certifi-
cated prior to 1992, and qualification of alter-
nate engine or avionics fits. A sponsor seek-
ing to have a device qualified in accordance 
with the standards contained in this QPS ap-
pendix should submit a VDR to the respon-
sible Flight Standards office as early as pos-
sible in the planning stages. The responsible 
Flight Standards office is the final authority 
to approve the data to be used as validation 
material for the QTG. 

b. The VDR should identify (in matrix for-

mat) sources of data for all required tests. It 
should also provide guidance regarding the 
validity of these data for a specific engine 
type, thrust rating configuration, and the re-
vision levels of all avionics affecting air-
plane handling qualities and performance. 
The VDR should include rationale or expla-
nation in cases where data or parameters are 
missing, engineering simulation data are to 
be used, flight test methods require expla-
nation, or there is any deviation from data 
requirements. Additionally, the document 
should refer to other appropriate sources of 
validation data (e.g., sound and vibration 
data documents). 

c. The Sample Validation Data Roadmap 

(VDR) for airplanes, shown in Table A2C, de-
picts a generic roadmap matrix identifying 
sources of validation data for an abbreviated 
list of tests. This document is merely a sam-
ple and does not provide actual data. A com-
plete matrix should address all test condi-
tions and provide actual data and data 
sources. 

d. Two examples of rationale pages are pre-

sented in Appendix F of the IATA ‘‘Flight 
Simulator Design and Performance Data Re-
quirements.’’ These illustrate the type of 
airplane and avionics configuration informa-
tion and descriptive engineering rationale 
used to describe data anomalies or provide 
an acceptable basis for using alternative 
data for QTG validation requirements. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00106

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

97 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00107

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09MY08.002</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

98 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

13. A

CCEPTANCE

G

UIDELINES FOR

A

LTERNATIVE

 

E

NGINES

D

ATA

a. Background 

(1) For a new airplane type, the majority of 

flight validation data are collected on the 
first airplane configuration with a ‘‘base-
line’’ engine type. These data are then used 
to validate all flight simulators representing 
that airplane type. 

(2) Additional flight test validation data 

may be needed for flight simulators rep-
resenting an airplane with engines of a dif-
ferent type than the baseline, or for engines 
with thrust rating that is different from pre-
viously validated configurations. 

(3) When a flight simulator with alternate 

engines is to be qualified, the QTG should 
contain tests against flight test validation 
data for selected cases where engine dif-
ferences are expected to be significant. 

b. Approval Guidelines For Validating 

Alternate Engine Applications 

(1) The following guidelines apply to flight 

simulators representing airplanes with alter-
nate engine applications or with more than 
one engine type or thrust rating. 

(2) Validation tests can be segmented into 

two groups, those that are dependent on en-
gine type or thrust rating and those that are 
not. 

(3) For tests that are independent of engine 

type or thrust rating, the QTG can be based 
on validation data from any engine applica-
tion. Tests in this category should be des-
ignated as independent of engine type or 
thrust rating. 

(4) For tests that are affected by engine 

type, the QTG should contain selected en-
gine-specific flight test data sufficient to 
validate that particular airplane-engine con-
figuration. These effects may be due to en-
gine dynamic characteristics, thrust levels 
or engine-related airplane configuration 
changes. This category is primarily charac-
terized by variations between different en-
gine manufacturers’ products, but also in-
cludes differences due to significant engine 
design changes from a previously flight-vali-
dated configuration within a single engine 
type. See Table A2D, Alternate Engine Vali-
dation Flight Tests in this section for a list 
of acceptable tests. 

(5) Alternate engine validation data should 

be based on flight test data, except as noted 
in sub-paragraphs 13.c.(1) and (2), or where 
other data are specifically allowed (e.g., en-
gineering simulator/simulation data). If cer-
tification of the flight characteristics of the 
airplane with a new thrust rating (regardless 
of percentage change) does require certifi-
cation flight testing with a comprehensive 

stability and control flight instrumentation 
package, then the conditions described in 
Table A2D in this section should be obtained 
from flight testing and presented in the 
QTG. Flight test data, other than throttle 
calibration data, are not required if the new 
thrust rating is certified on the airplane 
without need for a comprehensive stability 
and control flight instrumentation package. 

(6) As a supplement to the engine-specific 

flight tests listed in Table A2D and baseline 
engine-independent tests, additional engine- 
specific engineering validation data should 
be provided in the QTG, as appropriate, to fa-
cilitate running the entire QTG with the al-
ternate engine configuration. The sponsor 
and the responsible Flight Standards office 
should agree in advance on the specific vali-
dation tests to be supported by engineering 
simulation data. 

(7) A matrix or VDR should be provided 

with the QTG indicating the appropriate val-
idation data source for each test. 

(8) The flight test conditions in Table A2D 

are appropriate and should be sufficient to 
validate implementation of alternate en-
gines in a flight simulator. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

QPS R

EQUIREMENT

 

c. Test Requirements 

(1) The QTG must contain selected engine- 

specific flight test data sufficient to validate 
the alternative thrust level when: 

(a) the engine type is the same, but the 

thrust rating exceeds that of a previously 
flight-test validated configuration by five 
percent (5%) or more; or 

(b) the engine type is the same, but the 

thrust rating is less than the lowest pre-
viously flight-test validated rating by fifteen 
percent (15%) or more. See Table A2D for a 
list of acceptable tests. 

(2) Flight test data is not required if the 

thrust increase is greater than 5%, but flight 
tests have confirmed that the thrust in-
crease does not change the airplane’s flight 
characteristics. 

(3) Throttle calibration data (i.e., com-

manded power setting parameter versus 
throttle position) must be provided to vali-
date all alternate engine types and engine 
thrust ratings that are higher or lower than 
a previously validated engine. Data from a 
test airplane or engineering test bench with 
the correct engine controller (both hardware 
and software) are required. 

E

ND

QPS R

EQUIREMENT

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

QPS R

EQUIREMENT

 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00108

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

99 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

T

ABLE

A2D—A

LTERNATIVE

E

NGINE

V

ALIDATION

F

LIGHT

T

ESTS

 

Entry No. 

Test description 

Alternative 

engine type 

Alternative 

thrust rating

2

 

1.b.1., 1.b.4. ......................

Normal take-off/ground acceleration time and distance 

1.b.2. .................................

V

mcg

, if performed for airplane certification 

1.b.5. .................................
1.b.8. .................................

Engine-out take-off 
Dynamic engine failure after take-off. 

Either test 

may be 
performed.

1.b.7. .................................

Rejected take-off if performed for airplane certification 

1.d.1. .................................

Cruise performance 

1.f.1., 1.f.2. ........................

Engine acceleration and deceleration 

2.a.7. .................................

Throttle calibration

1

 X 

2.c.1. .................................

Power change dynamics (acceleration) 

2.d.1. .................................

V

mca

if performed for airplane certification 

2.d.5. .................................

Engine inoperative trim 

2.e.1. .................................

Normal landing 

1

Must be provided for all changes in engine type or thrust rating; see paragraph 13.c.(3). 

2

See paragraphs 13.c.(1) through 13.c.(3), for a definition of applicable thrust ratings. 

E

ND

QPS R

EQUIREMENT

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

14. A

CCEPTANCE

G

UIDELINES FOR

A

LTERNATIVE

 

A

VIONICS

(F

LIGHT

-R

ELATED

C

OMPUTERS AND

 

C

ONTROLLERS

a. Background 

(1) For a new airplane type, the majority of 

flight validation data are collected on the 
first airplane configuration with a ‘‘base-
line’’ flight-related avionics ship-set; (see 
subparagraph b.(2) of this section). These 
data are then used to validate all flight sim-
ulators representing that airplane type. 

(2) Additional validation data may be re-

quired for flight simulators representing an 
airplane with avionics of a different hard-
ware design than the baseline, or a different 
software revision than previously validated 
configurations. 

(3) When a flight simulator with additional 

or alternate avionics configurations is to be 
qualified, the QTG should contain tests 
against validation data for selected cases 
where avionics differences are expected to be 
significant. 

b. Approval Guidelines for Validating 

Alternate Avionics 

(1) The following guidelines apply to flight 

simulators representing airplanes with a re-
vised avionics configuration, or more than 
one avionics configuration. 

(2) The baseline validation data should be 

based on flight test data, except where other 
data are specifically allowed (e.g., engineer-
ing flight simulator data). 

(3) The airplane avionics can be segmented 

into two groups, systems or components 
whose functional behavior contributes to the 
aircraft response presented in the QTG re-

sults, and systems that do not. The following 
avionics are examples of contributory sys-
tems for which hardware design changes or 
software revisions may lead to significant 
differences in the aircraft response relative 
to the baseline avionics configuration: 
Flight control computers and controllers for 
engines, autopilot, braking system, 
nosewheel steering system, and high lift sys-
tem. Related avionics such as stall warning 
and augmentation systems should also be 
considered. 

(4) The acceptability of validation data 

used in the QTG for an alternative avionics 
fit should be determined as follows: 

(a) For changes to an avionics system or 

component that do not affect QTG validation 
test response, the QTG test can be based on 
validation data from the previously vali-
dated avionics configuration. 

(b) For an avionics change to a contribu-

tory system, where a specific test is not af-
fected by the change (e.g., the avionics 
change is a Built In Test Equipment (BITE) 
update or a modification in a different flight 
phase), the QTG test can be based on valida-
tion data from the previously-validated avi-
onics configuration. The QTG should include 
authoritative justification (e.g., from the 
airplane manufacturer or system supplier) 
that this avionics change does not affect the 
test. 

(c) For an avionics change to a contribu-

tory system, the QTG may be based on vali-
dation data from the previously-validated 
avionics configuration if no new 
functionality is added and the impact of the 
avionics change on the airplane response is 
small and based on acceptable aeronautical 
principles with proven success history and 
valid outcomes. This should be supplemented 
with avionics-specific validation data from 
the airplane manufacturer’s engineering 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00109

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

100 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

simulation, generated with the revised avi-
onics configuration. The QTG should also in-
clude an explanation of the nature of the 
change and its effect on the airplane re-
sponse. 

(d) For an avionics change to a contribu-

tory system that significantly affects some 
tests in the QTG or where new functionality 
is added, the QTG should be based on valida-
tion data from the previously validated avi-
onics configuration and supplemental avi-
onics-specific flight test data sufficient to 
validate the alternate avionics revision. Ad-
ditional flight test validation data may not 
be needed if the avionics changes were cer-
tified without the need for testing with a 
comprehensive flight instrumentation pack-
age. The airplane manufacturer should co-
ordinate flight simulator data requirements, 
in advance with the responsible Flight 
Standards office. 

(5) A matrix or ‘‘roadmap’’ should be pro-

vided with the QTG indicating the appro-
priate validation data source for each test. 
The roadmap should include identification of 
the revision state of those contributory avi-
onics systems that could affect specific test 
responses if changed. 

15. T

RANSPORT

D

ELAY

T

ESTING

 

a. This paragraph explains how to deter-

mine the introduced transport delay through 
the flight simulator system so that it does 
not exceed a specific time delay. The trans-
port delay should be measured from control 
inputs through the interface, through each 
of the host computer modules and back 
through the interface to motion, flight in-
strument, and visual systems. The transport 
delay should not exceed the maximum allow-
able interval. 

b. Four specific examples of transport 

delay are: 

(1) Simulation of classic non-computer 

controlled aircraft; 

(2) Simulation of computer controlled air-

craft using real airplane black boxes; 

(3) Simulation of computer controlled air-

craft using software emulation of airplane 
boxes; 

(4) Simulation using software avionics or 

re-hosted instruments. 

c. Figure A2C illustrates the total trans-

port delay for a non-computer-controlled air-
plane or the classic transport delay test. 
Since there are no airplane-induced delays 
for this case, the total transport delay is 
equivalent to the introduced delay. 

d. Figure A2D illustrates the transport 

delay testing method using the real airplane 
controller system. 

e. To obtain the induced transport delay 

for the motion, instrument and visual signal, 
the delay induced by the airplane controller 
should be subtracted from the total trans-
port delay. This difference represents the in-

troduced delay and should not exceed the 
standards prescribed in Table A1A. 

f. Introduced transport delay is measured 

from the flight deck control input to the re-
action of the instruments and motion and 
visual systems (See Figure A2C). 

g. The control input may also be intro-

duced after the airplane controller system 
and the introduced transport delay measured 
directly from the control input to the reac-
tion of the instruments, and simulator mo-
tion and visual systems (See Figure A2D). 

h. Figure A2E illustrates the transport 

delay testing method used on a flight simu-
lator that uses a software emulated airplane 
controller system. 

i. It is not possible to measure the intro-

duced transport delay using the simulated 
airplane controller system architecture for 
the pitch, roll and yaw axes. Therefore, the 
signal should be measured directly from the 
pilot controller. The flight simulator manu-
facturer should measure the total transport 
delay and subtract the inherent delay of the 
actual airplane components because the real 
airplane controller system has an inherent 
delay provided by the airplane manufacturer. 
The flight simulator manufacturer should 
ensure that the introduced delay does not ex-
ceed the standards prescribed in Table A1A. 

j. Special measurements for instrument 

signals for flight simulators using a real air-
plane instrument display system instead of a 
simulated or re-hosted display. For flight in-
strument systems, the total transport delay 
should be measured and the inherent delay of 
the actual airplane components subtracted 
to ensure that the introduced delay does not 
exceed the standards prescribed in Table 
A1A. 

(1) Figure A2FA illustrates the transport 

delay procedure without airplane display 
simulation. The introduced delay consists of 
the delay between the control movement and 
the instrument change on the data bus. 

(2) Figure A2FB illustrates the modified 

testing method required to measure intro-
duced delay due to software avionics or re- 
hosted instruments. The total simulated in-
strument transport delay is measured and 
the airplane delay should be subtracted from 
this total. This difference represents the in-
troduced delay and should not exceed the 
standards prescribed in Table A1A. The in-
herent delay of the airplane between the 
data bus and the displays is indicated in fig-
ure A2FA. The display manufacturer should 
provide this delay time. 

k. Recorded signals. The signals recorded 

to conduct the transport delay calculations 
should be explained on a schematic block 
diagram. The flight simulator manufacturer 
should also provide an explanation of why 
each signal was selected and how they relate 
to the above descriptions. 

l. Interpretation of results. Flight simu-

lator results vary over time from test to test 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00110

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

101 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

due to ‘‘sampling uncertainty.’’ All flight 
simulators run at a specific rate where all 
modules are executed sequentially in the 
host computer. The flight controls input can 
occur at any time in the iteration, but these 
data will not be processed before the start of 
the new iteration. For example, a flight sim-
ulator running at 60 Hz may have a dif-
ference of as much as 16.67 msec between test 
results. This does not mean that the test has 
failed. Instead, the difference is attributed to 
variations in input processing. In some con-

ditions, the host simulator and the visual 
system do not run at the same iteration rate, 
so the output of the host computer to the 
visual system will not always be syn-
chronized. 

m. The transport delay test should account 

for both daylight and night modes of oper-
ation of the visual system. In both cases, the 
tolerances prescribed in Table A1A must be 
met and the motion response should occur 
before the end of the first video scan con-
taining new information. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00111

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

102 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00112

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09MY08.003</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

103 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

16. C

ONTINUING

Q

UALIFICATION

E

VALUATIONS

— 

V

ALIDATION

T

EST

D

ATA

P

RESENTATION

 

a. Background 

(1) The MQTG is created during the initial 

evaluation of a flight simulator. This is the 
master document, as amended, to which 
flight simulator continuing qualification 
evaluation test results are compared. 

(2) The currently accepted method of pre-

senting continuing qualification evaluation 
test results is to provide flight simulator re-
sults over-plotted with reference data. Test 
results are carefully reviewed to determine if 
the test is within the specified tolerances. 
This can be a time consuming process, par-
ticularly when reference data exhibits rapid 
variations or an apparent anomaly requiring 
engineering judgment in the application of 
the tolerances. In these cases, the solution is 
to compare the results to the MQTG. The 
continuing qualification results are com-

pared to the results in the MQTG for accept-
ance. The flight simulator operator and the 
responsible Flight Standards office should 
look for any change in the flight simulator 
performance since initial qualification. 

b. Continuing Qualification Evaluation Test 

Results Presentation 

(1) Flight simulator operators are encour-

aged to over-plot continuing qualification 
validation test results with MQTG flight 
simulator results recorded during the initial 
evaluation and as amended. Any change in a 
validation test will be readily apparent. In 
addition to plotting continuing qualification 
validation test and MQTG results, operators 
may elect to plot reference data as well. 

(2) There are no suggested tolerances be-

tween flight simulator continuing qualifica-
tion and MQTG validation test results. In-
vestigation of any discrepancy between the 
MQTG and continuing qualification flight 
simulator performance is left to the discre-
tion of the flight simulator operator and the 
responsible Flight Standards office. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00113

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09MY08.004</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

104 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

(3) Differences between the two sets of re-

sults, other than variations attributable to 
repeatability issues that cannot be ex-
plained, should be investigated. 

(4) The flight simulator should retain the 

ability to over-plot both automatic and man-
ual validation test results with reference 
data. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

17. A

LTERNATIVE

D

ATA

S

OURCES

, P

ROCE

-

DURES

AND

I

NSTRUMENTATION

: L

EVEL

AND

 

L

EVEL

B S

IMULATORS

O

NLY

 

a. Sponsors are not required to use the al-

ternative data sources, procedures, and in-
strumentation. However, a sponsor may 
choose to use one or more of the alternative 
sources, procedures, and instrumentation de-
scribed in Table A2E. 

E

ND

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

b. It has become standard practice for ex-

perienced simulator manufacturers to use 
modeling techniques to establish data bases 
for new simulator configurations while 
awaiting the availability of actual flight test 
data. The data generated from the aero-
dynamic modeling techniques is then com-
pared to the flight test data when it becomes 
available. The results of such comparisons 
have become increasingly consistent, indi-
cating that these techniques, applied with 
the appropriate experience, are dependable 
and accurate for the development of aero-
dynamic models for use in Level A and Level 
B simulators. 

c. Based on this history of successful com-

parisons, the responsible Flight Standards 
office has concluded that those who are expe-
rienced in the development of aerodynamic 
models may use modeling techniques to alter 
the method for acquiring flight test data for 
Level A or Level B simulators. 

d. The information in Table A2E (Alter-

native Data Sources, Procedures, and Instru-
mentation) is presented to describe an ac-
ceptable alternative to data sources for sim-
ulator modeling and validation and an ac-
ceptable alternative to the procedures and 
instrumentation traditionally used to gather 
such modeling and validation data. 

(1) Alternative data sources that may be 

used for part or all of a data requirement are 
the Airplane Maintenance Manual, the Air-
plane Flight Manual (AFM), Airplane Design 
Data, the Type Inspection Report (TIR), Cer-
tification Data or acceptable supplemental 
flight test data. 

(2) The sponsor should coordinate with the 

responsible Flight Standards office prior to 
using alternative data sources in a flight 
test or data gathering effort. 

e. The responsible Flight Standards office 

position regarding the use of these alter-
native data sources, procedures, and instru-
mentation is based on the following pre-
sumptions: 

(1) Data gathered through the alternative 

means does not require angle of attack 
(AOA) measurements or control surface posi-
tion measurements for any flight test. How-
ever, AOA can be sufficiently derived if the 
flight test program ensures the collection of 
acceptable level, unaccelerated, trimmed 
flight data. All of the simulator time history 
tests that begin in level, unaccelerated, and 
trimmed flight, including the three basic 
trim tests and ‘‘fly-by’’ trims, can be a suc-
cessful validation of angle of attack by com-
parison with flight test pitch angle. (Note: 
Due to the criticality of angle of attack in 
the development of the ground effects model, 
particularly critical for normal landings and 
landings involving cross-control input appli-
cable to Level B simulators, stable ‘‘fly-by’’ 
trim data will be the acceptable norm for 
normal and cross-control input landing ob-
jective data for these applications.) 

(2) The use of a rigorously defined and fully 

mature simulation controls system model 
that includes accurate gearing and cable 
stretch characteristics (where applicable), 
determined from actual aircraft measure-
ments. Such a model does not require con-
trol surface position measurements in the 
flight test objective data in these limited ap-
plications. 

f. The sponsor is urged to contact the re-

sponsible Flight Standards office for clari-
fication of any issue regarding airplanes 
with reversible control systems. Table A2E is 
not applicable to Computer Controlled Air-
craft FFSs. 

g. Utilization of these alternate data 

sources, procedures, and instrumentation 
(Table A2E) does not relieve the sponsor 
from compliance with the balance of the in-
formation contained in this document rel-
ative to Level A or Level B FFSs. 

h. The term ‘‘inertial measurement sys-

tem’’ is used in the following table to include 
the use of a functional global positioning 
system (GPS). 

i. Synchronized video for the use of alter-

native data sources, procedures, and instru-
mentation should have: 

(1) Sufficient resolution to allow mag-

nification of the display to make appropriate 
measurement and comparisons; and 

(2) Sufficient size and incremental mark-

ing to allow similar measurement and com-
parison. The detail provided by the video 
should provide sufficient clarity and accu-
racy to measure the necessary parameter(s) 
to at least 

1

2

of the tolerance authorized for 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00114

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

105 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

the specific test being conducted and allow 
an integration of the parameter(s) in ques-
tion to obtain a rate of change. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

T

ABLE

A2E—A

LTERNATIVE

D

ATA

S

OURCES

, P

ROCEDURES

AND

I

NSTRUMENTATION

 

QPS REQUIREMENTS 

The standards in this table are required if the data gathering methods described in paragraph 

9 of 

Appendix A are not used. 

Information 

Table of objective tests 

Sim level 

Alternative data sources, procedures, and 

instrumentation 

Notes 

Test entry number and title 

1.a.1. Performance. Taxi. Min-

imum Radius turn.

TIR, AFM, or Design data may be used.

1.a.2. Performance. Taxi Rate 

of Turn vs. Nosewheel Steer-
ing Angle.

Data may be acquired by using a constant 

tiller position, measured with a pro-
tractor or full rudder pedal application 
for steady state turn, and synchronized 
video of heading indicator. If less than 
full rudder pedal is used, pedal position 
must be recorded..

A single procedure may not be 

adequate for all airplane 
steering systems, therefore 
appropriate measurement 
procedures must be devised 
and proposed for the respon-
sible Flight Standards office 
concurrence. 

1.b.1. Performance. Takeoff. 

Ground Acceleration Time 
and Distance.

Preliminary certification data may be 

used. Data may be acquired by using a 
stop watch, calibrated airspeed, and 
runway markers during a takeoff with 
power set before brake release. Power 
settings may be hand recorded. If an in-
ertial measurement system is installed, 
speed and distance may be derived 
from acceleration measurements.

1.b.2. Performance. Takeoff. 

Minimum Control Speed— 
ground (V

mcg

) using aero-

dynamic controls only (per ap-
plicable airworthiness stand-
ard) or low speed, engine in-
operative ground control char-
acteristics.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and force/position measure-
ments of flight deck controls.

Rapid throttle reductions at 

speeds near V

mcg

may be 

used while recording appro-
priate parameters. The 
nosewheel must be free to 
caster, or equivalently freed 
of sideforce generation. 

1.b.3. Performance. Takeoff. 

Minimum Unstick Speed (V

mu

or equivalent test to dem-
onstrate early rotation takeoff 
characteristics.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and the force/position 
measurements of flight deck controls.

1.b.4. Performance. Takeoff. 

Normal Takeoff.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and force/position measure-
ments of flight deck controls. AOA can 
be calculated from pitch attitude and 
flight path.

1.b.5. Performance. Takeoff. 

Critical Engine Failure during 
Takeoff.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and force/position measure-
ments of flight deck controls.

Record airplane dynamic re-

sponse to engine failure and 
control inputs required to cor-
rect flight path. 

1.b.6. Performance. Takeoff. 

Crosswind Takeoff.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and force/position measure-
ments of flight deck controls.

The ‘‘1:7 law’’ to 100 feet (30 

meters) is an acceptable 
wind profile. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00115

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

106 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

T

ABLE

A2E—A

LTERNATIVE

D

ATA

S

OURCES

, P

ROCEDURES

AND

I

NSTRUMENTATION

—Continued 

QPS REQUIREMENTS 

The standards in this table are required if the data gathering methods described in paragraph 

9 of 

Appendix A are not used. 

Information 

Table of objective tests 

Sim level 

Alternative data sources, procedures, and 

instrumentation 

Notes 

Test entry number and title 

1.b.7. Performance. Takeoff. 

Rejected Takeoff.

Data may be acquired with a syn-

chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments, thrust lever position, en-
gine parameters, and distance (e.g., 
runway markers). A stop watch is re-
quired..

1.c. 1. Performance. Climb. Nor-

mal Climb all engines oper-
ating..

Data may be acquired with a syn-

chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and engine power through-
out the climb range.

1.c.2. Performance. Climb. One 

engine Inoperative Climb.

Data may be acquired with a syn-

chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and engine power through-
out the climb range.

1.c.4. Performance. Climb. One 

Engine Inoperative Approach 
Climb (if operations in icing 
conditions are authorized).

Data may be acquired with a syn-

chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and engine power through-
out the climb range.

1.d.1. Cruise/Descent. Level 

flight acceleration..

Data may be acquired with a syn-

chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments, thrust lever position, en-
gine parameters, and elapsed time.

1.d.2. Cruise/Descent. Level 

flight deceleration..

Data may be acquired with a syn-

chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments, thrust lever position, en-
gine parameters, and elapsed time.

1.d.4. Cruise/Descent. Idle de-

scent.

Data may be acquired with a syn-

chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments, thrust lever position, en-
gine parameters, and elapsed time.

1.d.5. Cruise/Descent. Emer-

gency Descent.

Data may be acquired with a syn-

chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments, thrust lever position, en-
gine parameters, and elapsed time.

1.e.1. Performance. Stopping. 

Deceleration time and dis-
tance, using manual applica-
tion of wheel brakes and no 
reverse thrust on a dry run-
way.

Data may be acquired during landing tests 

using a stop watch, runway markers, 
and a synchronized video of calibrated 
airplane instruments, thrust lever posi-
tion and the pertinent parameters of en-
gine power.

1.e.2. Performance. Ground. 

Deceleration Time and Dis-
tance, using reverse thrust 
and no wheel brakes.

Data may be acquired during landing tests 

using a stop watch, runway markers, 
and a synchronized video of calibrated 
airplane instruments, thrust lever posi-
tion and pertinent parameters of engine 
power.

1.f.1. Performance. Engines. 

Acceleration.

Data may be acquired with a syn-

chronized video recording of engine in-
struments and throttle position.

1.f.2. Performance. Engines. 

Deceleration.

Data may be acquired with a syn-

chronized video recording of engine in-
struments and throttle position.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00116

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

107 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

T

ABLE

A2E—A

LTERNATIVE

D

ATA

S

OURCES

, P

ROCEDURES

AND

I

NSTRUMENTATION

—Continued 

QPS REQUIREMENTS 

The standards in this table are required if the data gathering methods described in paragraph 

9 of 

Appendix A are not used. 

Information 

Table of objective tests 

Sim level 

Alternative data sources, procedures, and 

instrumentation 

Notes 

Test entry number and title 

2.a.1.a.Handling Qualities. Stat-

ic Control Checks. Pitch Con-
troller Position vs. Force and 
Surface Position Calibration.

Surface position data may be acquired 

from flight data recorder (FDR) sensor 
or, if no FDR sensor, at selected, sig-
nificant column positions (encom-
passing significant column position data 
points), acceptable to the responsible 
Flight Standards office, using a control 
surface protractor on the ground. Force 
data may be acquired by using a hand 
held force gauge at the same column 
position data points..

For airplanes with reversible 

control systems, surface po-
sition data acquisition should 
be accomplished with winds 
less than 5 kts. 

2.a.2.a. Handling Qualities. Stat-

ic Control Checks. Roll Con-
troller Position vs. Force and 
Surface Position Calibration.

Surface position data may be acquired 

from flight data recorder (FDR) sensor 
or, if no FDR sensor, at selected, sig-
nificant wheel positions (encompassing 
significant wheel position data points), 
acceptable to the responsible Flight 
Standards office, using a control sur-
face protractor on the ground. Force 
data may be acquired by using a hand 
held force gauge at the same wheel po-
sition data points..

For airplanes with reversible 

control systems, surface po-
sition data acquisition should 
be accomplished with winds 
less than 5 kts. 

2.a.3.a.Handling Qualities. Stat-

ic Control Checks. Rudder 
Pedal Position vs. Force and 
Surface Position Calibration.

Surface position data may be acquired 

from flight data recorder (FDR) sensor 
or, if no FDR sensor, at selected, sig-
nificant rudder pedal positions (encom-
passing significant rudder pedal position 
data points), acceptable to the respon-
sible Flight Standards office, using a 
control surface protractor on the 
ground. Force data may be acquired by 
using a hand held force gauge at the 
same rudder pedal position data points..

For airplanes with reversible 

control systems, surface po-
sition data acquisition should 
be accomplished with winds 
less than 5 kts. 

2.a.4. Handling Qualities. Static 

Control Checks. Nosewheel 
Steering Controller Force and 
Position.

Breakout data may be acquired with a 

hand held force gauge. The remainder 
of the force to the stops may be cal-
culated if the force gauge and a pro-
tractor are used to measure force after 
breakout for at least 25% of the total 
displacement capability.

2.a.5. Handling Qualities. Static 

Control Checks. Rudder 
Pedal Steering Calibration.

Data may be acquired through the use of 

force pads on the rudder pedals and a 
pedal position measurement device, to-
gether with design data for nosewheel 
position.

2.a.6. Handling Qualities. Static 

Control Checks. Pitch Trim In-
dicator vs. Surface Position 
Calibration.

Data may be acquired through calcula-

tions.

2.a.7. Handling qualities. Static 

control tests. Pitch trim rate.

Data may be acquired by using a syn-

chronized video of pitch trim indication 
and elapsed time through range of trim 
indication.

2.a.8. Handling Qualities. Static 

Control tests. Alignment of 
Flight deck Throttle Lever 
Angle vs. Selected engine pa-
rameter.

Data may be acquired through the use of 

a temporary throttle quadrant scale to 
document throttle position. Use a syn-
chronized video to record steady state 
instrument readings or hand-record 
steady state engine performance read-
ings.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00117

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

108 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

T

ABLE

A2E—A

LTERNATIVE

D

ATA

S

OURCES

, P

ROCEDURES

AND

I

NSTRUMENTATION

—Continued 

QPS REQUIREMENTS 

The standards in this table are required if the data gathering methods described in paragraph 

9 of 

Appendix A are not used. 

Information 

Table of objective tests 

Sim level 

Alternative data sources, procedures, and 

instrumentation 

Notes 

Test entry number and title 

2.a.9. Handling qualities. Static 

control tests. Brake pedal po-
sition vs. force and brake sys-
tem pressure calibration.

Use of design or predicted data is accept-

able. Data may be acquired by meas-
uring deflection at ‘‘zero’’ and ‘‘max-
imum’’ and calculating deflections be-
tween the extremes using the airplane 
design data curve.

2.c.1. Handling qualities. Longi-

tudinal control tests. Power 
change dynamics.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and throttle position.

2.c.2. Handling qualities. Longi-

tudinal control tests. Flap/slat 
change dynamics.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and flap/slat position.

2.c.3. Handling qualities. Longi-

tudinal control tests. Spoiler/ 
speedbrake change dynamics.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and spoiler/speedbrake po-
sition.

2.c.4. Handling qualities. Longi-

tudinal control tests. Gear 
change dynamics.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and gear position.

2.c.5. Handling qualities. Longi-

tudinal control tests. Longitu-
dinal trim.

Data may be acquired through use of an 

inertial measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of flight deck controls 
position (previously calibrated to show 
related surface position) and the engine 
instrument readings.

2.c.6. Handling qualities. Longi-

tudinal control tests. Longitu-
dinal maneuvering stability 
(stick force/g).

Data may be acquired through the use of 

an inertial measurement system and a 
synchronized video of calibrated air-
plane instruments; a temporary, high 
resolution bank angle scale affixed to 
the attitude indicator; and a wheel and 
column force measurement indication.

2.c.7. Handling qualities. Longi-

tudinal control tests. Longitu-
dinal static stability.

Data may be acquired through the use of 

a synchronized video of airplane flight 
instruments and a hand held force 
gauge.

2.c.8. Handling qualities. Longi-

tudinal control tests. Stall 
characteristics.

Data may be acquired through a syn-

chronized video recording of a stop 
watch and calibrated airplane airspeed 
indicator. Hand-record the flight condi-
tions and airplane configuration.

Airspeeds may be cross 

checked with those in the 
TIR and AFM. 

2.c.9. Handling qualities. Longi-

tudinal control tests. Phugoid 
dynamics.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and force/position measure-
ments of flight deck controls.

2.c.10. Handling qualities. Lon-

gitudinal control tests. Short 
period dynamics.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and force/position measure-
ments of flight deck controls.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00118

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

109 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

T

ABLE

A2E—A

LTERNATIVE

D

ATA

S

OURCES

, P

ROCEDURES

AND

I

NSTRUMENTATION

—Continued 

QPS REQUIREMENTS 

The standards in this table are required if the data gathering methods described in paragraph 

9 of 

Appendix A are not used. 

Information 

Table of objective tests 

Sim level 

Alternative data sources, procedures, and 

instrumentation 

Notes 

Test entry number and title 

2.d.1. Handling qualities. Lateral 

directional tests. Minimum 
control speed, air (V

mca

or 

V

mci

), per applicable airworthi-

ness standard or Low speed 
engine inoperative handling 
characteristics in the air.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and force/position measure-
ments of flight deck controls.

2.d.2. Handling qualities. Lateral 

directional tests. Roll re-
sponse (rate).

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and force/position measure-
ments of flight deck lateral controls.

May be combined with step 

input of flight deck roll con-
troller test, 2.d.3. 

2.d.3. Handling qualities. Lateral 

directional tests. Roll re-
sponse to flight deck roll con-
troller step input.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and force/position measure-
ments of flight deck lateral controls.

2.d.4. Handling qualities. Lateral 

directional tests. Spiral sta-
bility.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments; force/position measure-
ments of flight deck controls; and a stop 
watch.

2.d.5. Handling qualities. Lateral 

directional tests. Engine inop-
erative trim.

Data may be hand recorded in-flight using 

high resolution scales affixed to trim 
controls that have been calibrated on 
the ground using protractors on the 
control/trim surfaces with winds less 
than 5 kts.OR Data may be acquired 
during second segment climb (with 
proper pilot control input for an engine- 
out condition) by using a synchronized 
video of calibrated airplane instruments 
and force/position measurements of 
flight deck controls.

Trimming during second seg-

ment climb is not a certifi-
cation task and should not be 
conducted until a safe alti-
tude is reached. 

2.d.6. Handling qualities. Lateral 

directional tests. Rudder re-
sponse.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and force/position measure-
ments of rudder pedals.

2.d.7. Handling qualities. Lateral 

directional tests. Dutch roll, 
(yaw damper OFF).

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and force/position measure-
ments of flight deck controls.

2.d.8. Handling qualities. Lateral 

directional tests. Steady state 
sideslip.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and force/position measure-
ments of flight deck controls.

Ground track and wind corrected heading 

may be used for sideslip angle. 

2.e.1. Handling qualities. Land-

ings. Normal landing.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and force/position measure-
ments of flight deck controls.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00119

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

110 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

T

ABLE

A2E—A

LTERNATIVE

D

ATA

S

OURCES

, P

ROCEDURES

AND

I

NSTRUMENTATION

—Continued 

QPS REQUIREMENTS 

The standards in this table are required if the data gathering methods described in paragraph 

9 of 

Appendix A are not used. 

Information 

Table of objective tests 

Sim level 

Alternative data sources, procedures, and 

instrumentation 

Notes 

Test entry number and title 

2.e.3. Handling qualities. Land-

ings. Crosswind landing.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and force/position measure-
ments of flight deck controls.

2.e.4. Handling qualities. Land-

ings. One engine inoperative 
landing.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and the force/position 
measurements of flight deck controls. 
Normal and lateral accelerations may 
be recorded in lieu of AOA and sideslip.

2.e.5. Handling qualities. Land-

ings. Autopilot landing (if ap-
plicable).

..........

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and force/position measure-
ments of flight deck controls.Normal 
and lateral accelerations may be re-
corded in lieu of AOA and sideslip.

2.e.6. Handling qualities. Land-

ings. All engines operating, 
autopilot, go around.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and force/position measure-
ments of flight deck controls. Normal 
and lateral accelerations may be re-
corded in lieu of AOA and sideslip.

2.e.7. Handling qualities. Land-

ings. One engine inoperative 
go around.

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and force/position measure-
ments of flight deck controls. Normal 
and lateral accelerations may be re-
corded in lieu of AOA and sideslip.

2.e.8. Handling qualities. Land-

ings. Directional control (rud-
der effectiveness with sym-
metric thrust).

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and force/position measure-
ments of flight deck controls. Normal 
and lateral accelerations may be re-
corded in lieu of AOA and sideslip.

2.e.9. Handling qualities. Land-

ings. Directional control (rud-
der effectiveness with asym-
metric reverse thrust).

Data may be acquired by using an inertial 

measurement system and a syn-
chronized video of calibrated airplane 
instruments and force/position measure-
ments of flight deck controls. Normal 
and lateral accelerations may be re-
corded in lieu of AOA and sideslip.

2.f. Handling qualities. Ground 

effect. Test to demonstrate 
ground effect.

Data may be acquired by using calibrated 

airplane instruments, an inertial meas-
urement system, and a synchronized 
video of calibrated airplane instruments 
and force/position measurements of 
flight deck controls.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00120

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

111 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

A

TTACHMENT

TO

A

PPENDIX

TO

P

ART

60— 

S

IMULATOR

S

UBJECTIVE

E

VALUATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

1. R

EQUIREMENTS

 

a. Except for special use airport models, 

described as Class III, all airport models re-
quired by this part must be representations 
of real-world, operational airports or rep-
resentations of fictional airports and must 
meet the requirements set out in Tables A3B 
or A3C of this attachment, as appropriate. 

b. If fictional airports are used, the sponsor 

must ensure that navigational aids and all 
appropriate maps, charts, and other naviga-
tional reference material for the fictional 
airports (and surrounding areas as nec-
essary) are compatible, complete, and accu-
rate with respect to the visual presentation 
of the airport model of this fictional airport. 
An SOC must be submitted that addresses 
navigation aid installation and performance 
and other criteria (including obstruction 
clearance protection) for all instrument ap-
proaches to the fictional airports that are 
available in the simulator. The SOC must 
reference and account for information in the 
terminal instrument procedures manual and 
the construction and availability of the re-
quired maps, charts, and other navigational 
material. This material must be clearly 
marked ‘‘for training purposes only.’’ 

c. When the simulator is being used by an 

instructor or evaluator for purposes of train-
ing, checking, or testing under this chapter, 
only airport models classified as Class I, 
Class II, or Class III may be used by the in-
structor or evaluator. Detailed descriptions/ 
definitions of these classifications are found 
in Appendix F of this part. 

d. When a person sponsors an FFS main-

tained by a person other than a U.S. certifi-
cate holder, the sponsor is accountable for 
that FFS originally meeting, and continuing 
to meet, the criteria under which it was 
originally qualified and the appropriate Part 
60 criteria, including the airport models that 
may be used by instructors or evaluators for 
purposes of training, checking, or testing 
under this chapter. 

e. Neither Class II nor Class III airport vis-

ual models are required to appear on the 
SOQ, and the method used for keeping in-
structors and evaluators apprised of the air-
port models that meet Class II or Class III 
requirements on any given simulator is at 
the option of the sponsor, but the method 
used must be available for review by the 
TPAA. 

f. When an airport model represents a real 

world airport and a permanent change is 

made to that real world airport (e.g., a new 
runway, an extended taxiway, a new lighting 
system, a runway closure) without a written 
extension grant from the responsible Flight 
Standards office (described in paragraph 1.g. 
of this section), an update to that airport 
model must be made in accordance with the 
following time limits: 

(1) For a new airport runway, a runway ex-

tension, a new airport taxiway, a taxiway ex-
tension, or a runway/taxiway closure—with-
in 90 days of the opening for use of the new 
airport runway, runway extension, new air-
port taxiway, or taxiway extension; or with-
in 90 days of the closure of the runway or 
taxiway. 

(2) For a new or modified approach light 

system—within 45 days of the activation of 
the new or modified approach light system. 

(3) For other facility or structural changes 

on the airport (e.g., new terminal, relocation 
of Air Traffic Control Tower)—within 180 
days of the opening of the new or changed fa-
cility or structure. 

g. If a sponsor desires an extension to the 

time limit for an update to a visual scene or 
airport model or has an objection to what 
must be updated in the specific airport 
model requirement, the sponsor must pro-
vide a written extension request to the re-
sponsible Flight Standards office stating the 
reason for the update delay and a proposed 
completion date, or explain why the update 
is not necessary (i.e., why the identified air-
port change will not have an impact on 
flight training, testing, or checking). A copy 
of this request or objection must also be sent 
to the POI/TCPM. The responsible Flight 
Standards office will send the official re-
sponse to the sponsor and a copy to the POI/ 
TCPM. If there is an objection, after con-
sultation with the appropriate POI/TCPM re-
garding the training, testing, or checking 
impact, the responsible Flight Standards of-
fice will send the official response to the 
sponsor and a copy to the POI/TCPM. 

E

ND

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

2. D

ISCUSSION

 

a. The subjective tests provide a basis for 

evaluating the capability of the simulator to 
perform over a typical utilization period; de-
termining that the simulator accurately 
simulates each required maneuver, proce-
dure, or task; and verifying correct oper-
ation of the simulator controls, instruments, 
and systems. The items listed in the fol-
lowing Tables are for simulator evaluation 
purposes only. They may not be used to limit 
or exceed the authorizations for use of a 
given level of simulator, as described on the 
SOQ, or as approved by the TPAA. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00121

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

112 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

b. The tests in Table A3A, Operations 

Tasks, in this attachment, address pilot 
functions, including maneuvers and proce-
dures (called flight tasks), and are divided by 
flight phases. The performance of these tasks 
by the responsible Flight Standards office 
includes an operational examination of the 
visual system and special effects. There are 
flight tasks included to address some fea-
tures of advanced technology airplanes and 
innovative training programs. For example, 
‘‘high angle-of-attack maneuvering’’ is in-
cluded to provide a required alternative to 
‘‘approach to stalls’’ for airplanes employing 
flight envelope protection functions. 

c. The tests in Table A3A, Operations 

Tasks, and Table A3G, Instructor Operating 
Station of this attachment, address the over-
all function and control of the simulator in-
cluding the various simulated environmental 
conditions; simulated airplane system oper-
ations (normal, abnormal, and emergency); 
visual system displays; and special effects 
necessary to meet flight crew training, eval-
uation, or flight experience requirements. 

d. All simulated airplane systems func-

tions will be assessed for normal and, where 
appropriate, alternate operations. Normal, 
abnormal, and emergency operations associ-
ated with a flight phase will be assessed dur-
ing the evaluation of flight tasks or events 
within that flight phase. Simulated airplane 
systems are listed separately under ‘‘Any 
Flight Phase’’ to ensure appropriate atten-
tion to systems checks. Operational naviga-
tion systems (including inertial navigation 
systems, global positioning systems, or other 
long-range systems) and the associated elec-
tronic display systems will be evaluated if 
installed. The pilot will include in his report 
to the TPAA, the effect of the system oper-
ation and any system limitation. 

e. Simulators demonstrating a satisfactory 

circling approach will be qualified for the 
circling approach maneuver and may be ap-
proved for such use by the TPAA in the spon-
sor’s FAA-approved flight training program. 
To be considered satisfactory, the circling 
approach will be flown at maximum gross 
weight for landing, with minimum visibility 
for the airplane approach category, and must 
allow proper alignment with a landing run-
way at least 90

° 

different from the instru-

ment approach course while allowing the 
pilot to keep an identifiable portion of the 
airport in sight throughout the maneuver 
(reference—14 CFR 91.175(e)). 

f. At the request of the TPAA, the respon-

sible Flight Standards office may assess a 
device to determine if it is capable of simu-
lating certain training activities in a spon-
sor’s training program, such as a portion of 
a Line Oriented Flight Training (LOFT) sce-
nario. Unless directly related to a require-
ment for the qualification level, the results 
of such an evaluation would not affect the 
qualification level of the simulator. How-

ever, if the responsible Flight Standards of-
fice determines that the simulator does not 
accurately simulate that training activity, 
the simulator would not be approved for that 
training activity. 

g. The FAA intends to allow the use of 

Class III airport models when the sponsor 
provides the TPAA (or other regulatory au-
thority) an appropriate analysis of the skills, 
knowledge, and abilities (SKAs) necessary 
for competent performance of the tasks in 
which this particular media element is used. 
The analysis should describe the ability of 
the FFS/visual media to provide an adequate 
environment in which the required SKAs are 
satisfactorily performed and learned. The 
analysis should also include the specific 
media element, such as the airport model. 

h. The TPAA may accept Class III airport 

models without individual observation pro-
vided the sponsor provides the TPAA with an 
acceptable description of the process for de-
termining the acceptability of a specific air-
port model, outlines the conditions under 
which such an airport model may be used, 
and adequately describes what restrictions 
will be applied to each resulting airport or 
landing area model. Examples of situations 
that may warrant Class

_

III model designa-

tion by the TPAA include the following: 

(a) Training, testing, or checking on very 

low visibility operations, including SMGCS 
operations. 

(b) Instrument operations training (includ-

ing instrument takeoff, departure, arrival, 
approach, and missed approach training, 
testing, or checking) using— 

(i) A specific model that has been geo-

graphically ‘‘moved’’ to a different location 
and aligned with an instrument procedure 
for another airport. 

(ii) A model that does not match changes 

made at the real-world airport (or landing 
area for helicopters) being modeled. 

(iii) A model generated with an ‘‘off-board’’ 

or an ‘‘on-board’’ model development tool 
(by providing proper latitude/longitude ref-
erence; correct runway or landing area ori-
entation, length, width, marking, and light-
ing information; and appropriate adjacent 
taxiway location) to generate a facsimile of 
a real world airport or landing area. 

i. Previously qualified simulators with cer-

tain early generation Computer Generated 
Image (CGI) visual systems, are limited by 
the capability of the Image Generator or the 
display system used. These systems are: 

(1) Early CGI visual systems that are ex-

cepted from the requirement of including 
runway numbers as a part of the specific 
runway marking requirements are: 

(a) Link NVS and DNVS. 
(b) Novoview 2500 and 6000. 
(c) FlightSafety VITAL series up to, and 

including, VITAL III, but not beyond. 

(d) Redifusion SP1, SP1T, and SP2. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00122

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

113 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

(2) Early CGI visual systems are excepted 

from the requirement of including runway 
numbers unless the runways are used for 
LOFT training sessions. These LOFT airport 
models require runway numbers but only for 
the specific runway end (one direction) used 
in the LOFT session. The systems required 
to display runway numbers only for LOFT 
scenes are: 

(a) FlightSafety VITAL IV. 
(b) Redifusion SP3 and SP3T. 
(c) Link-Miles Image II. 
(3) The following list of previously quali-

fied CGI and display systems are incapable of 

generating blue lights. These systems are 
not required to have accurate taxi-way edge 
lighting: 

(a) Redifusion SP1. 

(b) FlightSafety Vital IV. 

(c) Link-Miles Image II and Image IIT 

(d) XKD displays (even though the XKD 

image generator is capable of generating 
blue colored lights, the display cannot ac-
commodate that color). 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00123

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

114 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00124

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.050</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

115 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00125

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.051</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

116 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00126

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.052</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

117 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00127

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.053</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

118 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00128

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.054</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

119 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00129

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.055</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

120 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00130

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.056</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

121 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00131

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.057</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

122 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00132

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.058</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

123 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00133

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.059</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

124 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00134

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.060</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

125 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00135

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.061</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

126 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00136

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.062</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

127 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00137

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.063</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

128 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

T

ABLE

A3C—F

UNCTIONS AND

S

UBJECTIVE

T

ESTS

 

QPS requirements 

Entry No. 

Additional airport models beyond minimum required for qualification—Class II airport mod-

els 

Simulator level 

A B C D 

This table specifies the minimum airport model content and functionality necessary to add airport models to a simulator’s model 

library, beyond those necessary for qualification at the stated level, without the necessity of further involvement of the respon-
sible Flight Standards office or TPAA. 

Begin QPS Requirements 

1. ....................

Airport model management. The following is the minimum airport model management requirements for simula-
tors at Levels A, B, C, and D. 

1.a. ..........

The direction of strobe lights, approach lights, runway edge lights, visual landing aids, run-

way centerline lights, threshold lights, and touchdown zone lights on the ‘‘in-use’’ runway 
must be replicated.

X X X X 

2. ....................

Visual feature recognition. The following are the minimum distances at which runway features must be visible 
for simulators at Levels A, B, C, and D. Distances are measured from runway threshold to an airplane aligned 
with the runway on an extended 3

° 

glide-slope in simulated meteorological conditions that recreate the min-

imum distances for visibility. For circling approaches, all requirements of this section apply to the runway used 
for the initial approach and to the runway of intended landing. 

2.a. ..........

Runway definition, strobe lights, approach lights, and runway edge white lights from 5 sm 

(8 km) from the runway threshold.

X X X X 

2.b. ..........

Visual Approach Aid lights (VASI or PAPI) from 5 sm (8 km) from the runway threshold .....

2.c. ..........

Visual Approach Aid lights (VASI or PAPI) from 3 sm (5 km) from the runway threshold .....

2.d. ..........

Runway centerline lights and taxiway definition from 3 sm (5 km) from the runway thresh-

old.

X X X X 

2.e. ..........

Threshold lights and touchdown zone lights from 2 sm (3 km) from the runway threshold ...

2.f. ...........

Runway markings within range of landing lights for night scenes and as required by the 

surface resolution requirements on day scenes.

X X X X 

2.g. ..........

For circling approaches, the runway of intended landing and associated lighting must fade 

into view in a non-distracting manner.

X X X X 

3. ....................

Airport model content. The following prescribes the minimum requirements for what must be provided in an air-
port model and identifies other aspects of the airport environment that must correspond with that model for sim-
ulators at Levels A, B, C, and D. The detail must be developed using airport pictures, construction drawings 
and maps, or other similar data, or developed in accordance with published regulatory material; however, this 
does not require that airport models contain details that are beyond the designed capability of the currently 
qualified visual system. For circling approaches, all requirements of this section apply to the runway used for 
the initial approach and to the runway of intended landing. Only one ‘‘primary’’ taxi route from parking to the 
runway end will be required for each ‘‘in-use’’ runway. 

3.a. ..........

The surface and markings for each ‘‘in-use’’ runway: 

3.a.1. Threshold 

markings ..................................................................................................................

X X X X 

3.a.2. Runway 

numbers ......................................................................................................................

X X X X 

3.a.3. 

Touchdown zone markings .......................................................................................................

X X X X 

3.a.4. 

Fixed distance markings ...........................................................................................................

X X X X 

3.a.5. Edge 

markings ..........................................................................................................................

X X X X 

3.a.6. Centerline 

stripes ......................................................................................................................

X X X X 

3.b. ..........

The lighting for each ‘‘in-use’’ runway 

3.b.1. Threshold 

lights ........................................................................................................................

X X X X 

3.b.2. Edge 

lights ................................................................................................................................

X X X X 

3.b.3. End 

lights ..................................................................................................................................

X X X X 

3.b.4. Centerline 

lights ........................................................................................................................

X X X X 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00138

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

129 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

T

ABLE

A3C—F

UNCTIONS AND

S

UBJECTIVE

T

ESTS

—Continued 

QPS requirements 

Entry No. 

Additional airport models beyond minimum required for qualification—Class II airport mod-

els 

Simulator level 

A B C D 

3.b.5. 

Touchdown zone lights, if appropriate .....................................................................................

X X X X 

3.b.6. 

Leadoff lights, if appropriate .....................................................................................................

X X X X 

3.b.7. 

Appropriate visual landing aid(s) for that runway .....................................................................

X X X 

3.b.8. 

Appropriate approach lighting system for that runway .............................................................

3.c. ..........

The taxiway surface and markings associated with each ‘‘in-use’’ runway: 

3.c.1. Edge ..........................................................................................................................................

X X X X 

3.c.2. Centerline ..................................................................................................................................

X X X X 

3.c.3. 

Runway hold lines ....................................................................................................................

X X X X 

3.c.4. 

ILS critical area markings .........................................................................................................

X X X X 

3.d. ..........

The taxiway lighting associated with each ‘‘in-use’’ runway: 

3.d.1. Edge ..........................................................................................................................................

X X 

3.d.2. Centerline ..................................................................................................................................

X X X X 

3.d.3. 

Runway hold and ILS critical area lights ..................................................................................

X X X X 

4. ....................

Required model correlation with other aspects of the airport environment simulation The 

following are the minimum model correlation tests that must be conducted for simulators 
at Levels A, B, C, and D. 

4.a. ..........

The airport model must be properly aligned with the navigational aids that are associated 

with operations at the ‘‘in-use’’ runway.

X X X X 

4.b. ..........

Slopes in runways, taxiways, and ramp areas, if depicted in the visual scene, must not 

cause distracting or unrealistic effects.

X X X X 

5. ....................

Correlation with airplane and associated equipment. The following are the minimum correlation comparisons 
that must be made for simulators at Levels A, B, C, and D. 

5.a. .............

Visual system compatibility with aerodynamic programming ...................................................

X X X 

5.b. ..........

Accurate portrayal of environment relating to flight simulator attitudes ...................................

5.c. ..........

Visual cues to assess sink rate and depth perception during landings ...................................

5.d. ..........

Visual effects for each visible, own-ship, airplane external light(s) .........................................

X X 

6. ....................

Scene quality. The following are the minimum scene quality tests that must be conducted for simulators at Lev-
els A, B, C, and D. 

6.a. ..........

Surfaces and textural cues must be free of apparent and distracting quantization (aliasing) 

6.b. .................

Correct color and realistic textural cues ...................................................................................

X X 

6.c. .................

Light points free from distracting jitter, smearing or streaking .................................................

X X X X 

7. ....................

Instructor controls of the following: The following are the minimum instructor controls that must be available in 
simulators at Levels A, B, C, and D. 

7.a. ..........

Environmental effects, e.g., cloud base (if used), cloud effects, cloud density, visibility in 

statute miles/kilometers and RVR in feet/meters.

X X X X 

7.b. ..........

Airport selection ........................................................................................................................

X X X X 

7.c. ..........

Airport lighting including variable intensity ...............................................................................

X X X X 

7.d. ..........

Dynamic effects including ground and flight traffic ..................................................................

X X 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00139

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

130 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

T

ABLE

A3C—F

UNCTIONS AND

S

UBJECTIVE

T

ESTS

—Continued 

QPS requirements 

Entry No. 

Additional airport models beyond minimum required for qualification—Class II airport mod-

els 

Simulator level 

A B C D 

End QPS Requirements 

Begin Information 

8. ....................

Sponsors are not required to provide every detail of a runway, but the detail that is pro-

vided must be correct within the capabilities of the system.

X X X X 

End Information 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00140

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

131 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00141

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.064</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

132 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00142

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.065</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

133 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00143

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.066</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

134 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00144

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.067</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

135 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00145

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.068</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

136 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00146

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.069</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

137 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

T

ABLE

A3E—F

UNCTIONS AND

S

UBJECTIVE

T

ESTS

 

QPS Requirements 

Entry No. 

Sound system 

Simulator level 

A B C D 

The following checks are performed during a normal flight profile with motion system ON. 

1. ...............

Precipitation ....................................................................................................................................

X X 

2. ...............

Rain removal equipment. ...............................................................................................................

X X 

3. ...............

Significant airplane noises perceptible to the pilot during normal operations ...............................

4. ...............

Abnormal operations for which there are associated sound cues including, engine malfunc-

tions, landing gear/tire malfunctions, tail and engine pod strike and pressurization malfunc-
tion.

X X 

5. ...............

Sound of a crash when the flight simulator is landed in excess of limitations .............................

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00147

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

138 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00148

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER20MY16.070</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

139 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

T

ABLE

A3G—F

UNCTIONS AND

S

UBJECTIVE

T

ESTS

 

QPS Requirements 

Entry No. 

Special effects 

Simulator level 

A B C D 

Functions in this table are subject to evaluation only if appropriate for the airplane and/or the system is installed on the specific 

simulator. 

1. ...............

Simulator Power Switch(es) ...........................................................................................................

X X X X 

2. ...............

Airplane conditions 

2.a. ....

Gross weight, center of gravity, fuel loading and allocation ..........................................................

X X X X 

2.b. ....

Airplane systems status .................................................................................................................

X X X X 

2.c. .....

Ground crew functions (e.g., ext. power, push back) ....................................................................

X X X X 

3. ...............

Airports 

3.a. ....

Number and selection ....................................................................................................................

X X X X 

3.b. ....

Runway selection ...........................................................................................................................

X X X X 

3.c. .....

Runway surface condition (e.g., rough, smooth, icy, wet) ............................................................

3.d. ....

Preset positions (e.g., ramp, gate, #1 for takeoff, takeoff position, over FAF) .............................

3.e. ....

Lighting controls .............................................................................................................................

X X X X 

4. ...............

Environmental controls 

4.a .....

Visibility (statute miles (kilometers)) ..............................................................................................

X X X X 

4.b. ....

Runway visual range (in feet (meters)) .........................................................................................

X X X X 

4.c. .....

Temperature ...................................................................................................................................

X X X X 

4.d. ....

Climate conditions (e.g., ice, snow, rain) .......................................................................................

X X X X 

4.e. ....

Wind speed and direction ..............................................................................................................

X X X X 

4.f. .....

Windshear ......................................................................................................................................

X X 

4.g. ....

Clouds (base and tops) ..................................................................................................................

X X X X 

5. ...............

Airplane system malfunctions (Inserting and deleting malfunctions into the simulator) ...............

6. ...............

Locks, Freezes, and Repositioning 

6.a. ....

Problem (all) freeze/release ...........................................................................................................

X X X X 

6.b. ....

Position (geographic) freeze/release .............................................................................................

X X X X 

6.c. .....

Repositioning (locations, freezes, and releases) ...........................................................................

X X X X 

6.d. ....

Ground speed control ....................................................................................................................

X X X X 

7. ...............

Remote IOS ...................................................................................................................................

X X X X 

8. ...............

Sound Controls. On/off/adjustment ................................................................................................

X X X X 

9. ...............

Motion/Control Loading System 

9.a. ....

On/off/emergency stop ...................................................................................................................

X X X X 

10. .............

Observer Seats/Stations. Position/Adjustment/Positive restraint system ......................................

X X X 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00149

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

140 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

1. I

NTRODUCTION

 

a. The following is an example test sched-

ule for an Initial/Upgrade evaluation that 
covers the majority of the requirements set 
out in the Functions and Subjective test re-
quirements. It is not intended that the 
schedule be followed line by line, rather, the 
example should be used as a guide for pre-
paring a schedule that is tailored to the air-
plane, sponsor, and training task. 

b. Functions and subjective tests should be 

planned. This information has been orga-
nized as a reference document with the con-
siderations, methods, and evaluation notes 
for each individual aspect of the simulator 
task presented as an individual item. In this 
way the evaluator can design his or her own 
test plan, using the appropriate sections to 
provide guidance on method and evaluation 
criteria. Two aspects should be present in 
any test plan structure: 

(1) An evaluation of the simulator to deter-

mine that it replicates the aircraft and per-
forms reliably for an uninterrupted period 
equivalent to the length of a typical training 
session. 

(2) The simulator should be capable of op-

erating reliably after the use of training de-
vice functions such as repositions or mal-
functions. 

c. A detailed understanding of the training 

task will naturally lead to a list of objec-
tives that the simulator should meet. This 
list will form the basis of the test plan. Addi-
tionally, once the test plan has been formu-
lated, the initial conditions and the evalua-
tion criteria should be established. The eval-
uator should consider all factors that may 
have an influence on the characteristics ob-
served during particular training tasks in 
order to make the test plan successful. 

2. E

VENTS

 

a. Initial Conditions 

(1) Airport. 
(2) QNH. 
(3) Temperature. 
(4) Wind/Crosswind. 
(5) Zero Fuel Weight /Fuel/Gross Weight 

/Center of Gravity. 

b. Initial Checks 

(1) Documentation of Simulator. 
(a) Simulator Acceptance Test Manuals. 
(b) Simulator Approval Test Guide. 
(c) Technical Logbook Open Item List. 
(d) Daily Functional Pre-flight Check. 
(2) Documentation of User/Carrier Flight 

Logs. 

(a) Simulator Operating/Instructor Man-

ual. 

(b) Difference List (Aircraft/Simulator). 

(c) Flight Crew Operating Manuals. 
(d) Performance Data for Different Fields. 
(e) Crew Training Manual. 
(f) Normal/Abnormal/Emergency Check-

lists. 

(3) Simulator External Checks. 
(a) Appearance and Cleanliness. 
(b) Stairway/Access Bridge. 
(c) Emergency Rope Ladders. 
(d) ‘‘Motion On’’/‘‘Flight in Progress’’ 

Lights. 

(4) Simulator Internal Checks. 
(a) Cleaning/Disinfecting Towels (for clean-

ing oxygen masks). 

(b) Flight deck Layout (compare with dif-

ference list). 

(5) Equipment. 
(a) Quick Donning Oxygen Masks. 
(b) Head Sets. 
(c) Smoke Goggles. 
(d) Sun Visors. 
(e) Escape Rope. 
(f) Chart Holders. 
(g) Flashlights. 
(h) Fire Extinguisher (inspection date). 
(i) Crash Axe. 
(j) Gear Pins. 

c. Power Supply and APU Start Checks 

(1) Batteries and Static Inverter. 
(2) APU Start with Battery. 
(3) APU Shutdown using Fire Handle. 
(4) External Power Connection. 
(5) APU Start with External Power. 
(6) Abnormal APU Start/Operation. 

d. Flight deck Checks 

(1) Flight deck Preparation Checks. 
(2) FMC Programming. 
(3) Communications and Navigational Aids 

Checks. 

e. Engine Start 

(1) Before Start Checks. 
(2) Battery start with Ground Air Supply 

Unit. 

(3) Engine Crossbleed Start. 
(4) Normal Engine Start. 
(5) Abnormal Engine Starts. 
(6) Engine Idle Readings. 
(7) After Start Checks. 

f. Taxi Checks 

(1) Pushback/Powerback. 
(2) Taxi Checks. 
(3) Ground Handling Check: 
(a) Power required to initiate ground roll. 
(b) Thrust response. 
(c) Nosewheel and Pedal Steering. 
(d) Nosewheel Scuffing. 
(e) Perform 180 degree turns. 
(f) Brakes Response and Differential Brak-

ing using Normal, Alternate and Emergency. 

(g) Brake Systems. 
(h) Eye height and fore/aft position. 
(4) Runway Roughness. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00150

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

141 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

g. Visual Scene—Ground Assessment. Select 3 

different airport models and perform the fol-
lowing checks with Day, Dusk and Night se-
lected, as appropriate: 

(1) Visual Controls. 
(a) Daylight, Dusk, Night Scene Controls. 
(b) Flight deck ‘‘Daylight’’ ambient light-

ing. 

(c) Environment Light Controls. 
(d) Runway Light Controls. 
(e) Taxiway Light Controls. 
(2) Airport Model Content. 
(a) Ramp area for buildings, gates, 

airbridges, maintenance ground equipment, 
parked aircraft. 

(b) Daylight shadows, night time light 

pools. 

(c) Taxiways for correct markings, taxi-

way/runway, marker boards, CAT I and II/III 
hold points, taxiway shape/grass areas, taxi-
way light (positions and colors). 

(d) Runways for correct markings, lead-off 

lights, boards, runway slope, runway light 
positions, and colors, directionality of run-
way lights. 

(e) Airport environment for correct terrain 

and significant features. 

(f) Visual scene quantization (aliasing), 

color, and occulting levels. 

(3) Ground Traffic Selection. 
(4) Environment Effects. 
(a) Low cloud scene. 
(i) Rain: 
(A) Runway surface scene. 
(B) Windshield wiper—operation and sound. 
(ii) Hail: 
(A) Runway surface scene. 
(B) Windshield wiper—operation and sound. 
(b) Lightning/thunder. 
(c) Snow/ice runway surface scene. 
(d) Fog. 
h. Takeoff. Select one or several of the fol-

lowing test cases: 

(1) T/O Configuration Warnings. 
(2) Engine Takeoff Readings. 
(3) Rejected Takeoff (Dry/Wet/Icy Runway) 

and check the following: 

(a) Autobrake function. 
(b) Anti-skid operation. 
(c) Motion/visual effects during decelera-

tion. 

(d) Record stopping distance (use runway 

plot or runway lights remaining). 

Continue taxiing along the runway while 

applying brakes and check the following: 

(e) Center line lights alternating red/white 

for 2000 feet/600 meters. 

(f) Center line lights all red for 1000 feet/300 

meters. 

(g) Runway end, red stop bars. 
(h) Braking fade effect. 
(i) Brake temperature indications. 
(4) Engine Failure between VI and V2. 
(5) Normal Takeoff: 
(a) During ground roll check the following: 
(i) Runway rumble. 
(ii) Acceleration cues. 

(iii) Groundspeed effects. 
(iv) Engine sounds. 
(v) Nosewheel and rudder pedal steering. 
(b) During and after rotation, check the 

following: 

(i) Rotation characteristics. 
(ii) Column force during rotation. 
(iii) Gear uplock sounds/bumps. 
(iv) Effect of slat/flap retraction during 

climbout. 

(6) Crosswind Takeoff (check the fol-

lowing): 

(a) Tendency to turn into or out of the 

wind. 

(b) Tendency to lift upwind wing as air-

speed increases. 

(7) Windshear during Takeoff (check the 

following): 

(a) Controllable during windshear encoun-

ter. 

(b) Performance adequate when using cor-

rect techniques. 

(c) Windshear Indications satisfactory. 
(d) Motion cues satisfactory (particularly 

turbulence). 

(8) Normal Takeoff with Control Malfunc-

tion. 

(9) Low Visibility T/O (check the fol-

lowing): 

(a) Visual cues. 
(b) Flying by reference to instruments. 
(c) SID Guidance on LNAV. 
i. Climb Performance. Select one or several 

of the following test cases: 

(1) Normal Climb—Climb while maintain-

ing recommended speed profile and note fuel, 
distance and time. 

(2) Single Engine Climb—Trim aircraft in a 

zero wheel climb at V2. 

N

OTE

: Up to 5

° 

bank towards the operating 

engine(s) is permissible. Climb for 3 minutes 
and note fuel, distance, and time. Increase 
speed toward en route climb speed and re-
tract flaps. Climb for 3 minutes and note 
fuel, distance, and time. 

j. Systems Operation During Climb. 
Check normal operation and malfunctions 

as appropriate for the following systems: 

(1) Air conditioning/Pressurization/Ven-

tilation. 

(2) Autoflight. 
(3) Communications. 
(4) Electrical. 
(5) Fuel. 
(6) Icing Systems. 
(7) Indicating and Recording Systems. 
(8) Navigation/FMS. 
(9) Pneumatics. 
k. Cruise Checks. Select one or several of 

the following test cases: 

(1) Cruise Performance. 
(2) High Speed/High Altitude Handling 

(check the following): 

(a) Overspeed warning. 
(b) High Speed buffet. 
(c) Aircraft control satisfactory. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00151

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

142 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

(d) Envelope limiting functions on Com-

puter Controlled Aircraft. 

Reduce airspeed to below level flight buffet 

onset speed, start a turn, and check the fol-
lowing: 

(e) High Speed buffet increases with G 

loading. 

Reduce throttles to idle and start descent, 

deploy the speedbrake, and check the fol-
lowing: 

(f) Speedbrake indications. 
(g) Symmetrical deployment. 
(h) Airframe buffet. 
(i) Aircraft response hands off. 
(3) Yaw Damper Operation. Switch off yaw 

dampers and autopilot. Initiate a Dutch roll 
and check the following: 

(a) Aircraft dynamics. 
(b) Simulator motion effects. 
Switch on yaw dampers, re-initiate a 

Dutch roll and check the following: 

(c) Damped aircraft dynamics. 
(4) APU Operation. 
(5) Engine Gravity Feed. 
(6) Engine Shutdown and Driftdown Check: 

FMC operation Aircraft performance. 

(7) Engine Relight. 
l. Descent. Select one of the following test 

cases: 

(1) Normal Descent. Descend while main-

taining recommended speed profile and note 
fuel, distance and time. 

(2) Cabin Depressurization/Emergency De-

scent. 

m. Medium Altitude Checks. Select one or 

several of the following test cases: 

(1) High Angle of Attack/Stall. Trim the 

aircraft at 1.4 Vs, establish 1 kt/sec

2

decel-

eration rate, and check the following— 

(a) System displays/operation satisfactory. 
(b) Handling characteristics satisfactory. 
(c) Stall and Stick shaker speed. 
(d) Buffet characteristics and onset speed. 
(e) Envelope limiting functions on Com-

puter Controlled Aircraft. 

Recover to straight and level flight and 

check the following: 

(f) Handling characteristics satisfactory. 
(2) Turning Flight. Roll aircraft to left, es-

tablish a 30

° 

to 45

° 

bank angle, and check the 

following: 

(a) Stick force required, satisfactory. 
(b) Wheel requirement to maintain bank 

angle. 

(c) Slip ball response, satisfactory. 
(d) Time to turn 180

°

Roll aircraft from 45

° 

bank one way to 45

° 

bank the opposite direction while maintain-
ing altitude and airspeed—check the fol-
lowing: 

(e) Controllability during maneuver. 
(3) Degraded flight controls. 
(4) Holding Procedure (check the fol-

lowing:) 

(a) FMC operation. 
(b) Autopilot auto thrust performance. 
(5) Storm Selection (check the following:) 

(a) Weather radar controls. 
(b) Weather radar operation. 
(c) Visual scene corresponds with WXR 

pattern. 

(Fly through storm center, and check the 

following:) 

(d) Aircraft enters cloud. 
(e) Aircraft encounters representative tur-

bulence. 

(f) Rain/hail sound effects evident. 
As aircraft leaves storm area, check the fol-

lowing: 

(g) Storm effects disappear. 
(6) TCAS (check the following:) 
(a) Traffic appears on visual display. 
(b) Traffic appears on TCAS display(s). 
As conflicting traffic approaches, take rel-

evant avoiding action, and check the fol-
lowing: 

(c) Visual and TCAS system displays. 
n. Approach and Landing. Select one or sev-

eral of the following test cases while moni-
toring flight control and hydraulic systems 
for normal operation and with malfunctions 
selected: 

(1) Flaps/Gear Normal Operation. Check 

the following: 

(a) Time for extension/retraction. 
(b) Buffet characteristics. 
(2) Normal Visual Approach and Landing. 
Fly a normal visual approach and land-

ing—check the following: 

(a) Aircraft handling. 
(b) Spoiler operation. 
(c) Reverse thrust operation. 
(d) Directional control on the ground. 
(e) Touchdown cues for main and 

nosewheel. 

(f) Visual cues. 
(g) Motion cues. 
(h) Sound cues. 
(i) Brake and anti-skid operation. 
(3) Flaps/Gear Abnormal Operation or with 

hydraulic malfunctions. 

(4) Abnormal Wing Flaps/Slats Landing. 
(5) Manual Landing with Control Malfunc-

tion. 

(a) Aircraft handling. 
(b) Radio aids and instruments. 
(c) Airport model content and cues. 
(d) Motion cues. 
(e) Sound cues. 
(6) Non-precision Approach—All Engines 

Operating. 

(a) Aircraft handling. 
(b) Radio Aids and instruments. 
(c) Airport model content and cues. 
(d) Motion cues. 
(e) Sound cues. 
(7) Circling Approach. 
(a) Aircraft handling. 
(c) Radio Aids and instruments. 
(d) Airport model content and cues. 
(e) Motion cues. 
(f) Sound cues. 
(8) Non-precision Approach—One Engine 

Inoperative. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00152

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

143 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

(a) Aircraft handling. 
(b) Radio Aids and instruments. 
(c) Airport model content and cues. 
(d) Motion cues. 
(e) Sound cues. 
(9) One Engine Inoperative Go-around. 
(a) Aircraft handling. 
(b) Radio Aids and instruments. 
(c) Airport model content and cues. 
(d) Motion cues. 
(e) Sound cues. 
(10) CAT I Approach and Landing with raw- 

data ILS. 

(a) Aircraft handling. 
(b) Radio Aids and instruments. 
(c) Airport model content and cues. 
(d) Motion cues. 
(e) Sound cues. 
(11) CAT I Approach and Landing with 

Limiting Crosswind. 

(a) Aircraft handling. 
(b) Radio Aids and instruments. 
(c) Airport model content and cues. 
(d) Motion cues. 
(e) Sound cues. 
(12) CAT I Approach with Windshear. 

Check the following: 

(a) Controllable during windshear encoun-

ter. 

(b) Performance adequate when using cor-

rect techniques. 

(c) Windshear indications/warnings. 
(d) Motion cues (particularly turbulence). 
(13) CAT II Approach and Automatic Go- 

Around. 

(14) CAT III Approach and Landing—Sys-

tem Malfunctions. 

(15) CAT III Approach and Landing—1 En-

gine Inoperative. 

(16) GPWS evaluation. 
o. Visual Scene—In-Flight Assessment. 
Select three (3) different visual models and 

perform the following checks with ‘‘day,’’ 
‘‘dusk,’’ and ‘‘night’’ (as appropriate) se-
lected. Reposition the aircraft at or below 
2000 feet within 10 nm of the airfield. Fly the 
aircraft around the airport environment and 
assess control of the visual system and 
evaluate the Airport model content as de-
scribed below: 

(1) Visual Controls. 
(a) Daylight, Dusk, Night Scene Controls. 
(b) Environment Light Controls. 
(c) Runway Light Controls. 
(d) Taxiway Light Controls. 
(e) Approach Light Controls. 
(2) Airport model Content. 
(a) Airport environment for correct terrain 

and significant features. 

(b) Runways for correct markings, runway 

slope, directionality of runway lights. 

(c) Visual scene for quantization (aliasing), 

color, and occulting. 

Reposition the aircraft to a long, final ap-

proach for an ‘‘ILS runway.’’ Select flight 
freeze when the aircraft is 5-statute miles 

(sm)/8-kilometers (km) out and on the glide 
slope. Check the following: 

(3) Airport model content. 
(a) Airfield features. 
(b) Approach lights. 
(c) Runway definition. 
(d) Runway definition. 
(e) Runway edge lights and VASI lights. 
(f) Strobe lights. 
Release flight freeze. Continue flying the 

approach with NP engaged. Select flight 
freeze when aircraft is 3 sm/5 km out and on 
the glide slope. Check the following: 

(4) Airport model Content. 
(a) Runway centerline light. 
(b) Taxiway definition and lights. 
Release flight freeze and continue flying 

the approach with A/P engaged. Select flight 
freeze when aircraft is 2 sm/3 km out and on 
the glide slope. Check the following: 

(5) Airport model content. 
(a) Runway threshold lights. 
(b) Touchdown zone lights. 
At 200 ft radio altitude and still on glide 

slope, select Flight Freeze. Check the fol-
lowing: 

(6) Airport model content. 
(a) Runway markings. 
Set the weather to Category I conditions 

and check the following: 

(7) Airport model content. 
(a) Visual ground segment. 
Set the weather to Category II conditions, 

release Flight Freeze, re-select Flight Freeze 
at 100 feet radio altitude, and check the fol-
lowing: 

(8) Airport model content. 
(a) Visual ground segment. 
Select night/dusk (twilight) conditions and 

check the following: 

(9) Airport model content. 
(a) Runway markings visible within land-

ing light lobes. 

Set the weather to Category III conditions, 

release Flight Freeze, re-select Flight Freeze 
at 50 feet radio altitude and check the fol-
lowing: 

(10) Airport model content. 
(a) Visual ground segment. 
Set WX to a typical ‘‘missed approach? 

weather condition, release Flight Freeze, re- 
select Flight Freeze at 15 feet radio altitude, 
and check the following: 

(11) Airport model content. 
(a) Visual ground segment. 
When on the ground, stop the aircraft. Set 

0 feet RVR, ensure strobe/beacon tights are 
switched on and check the following: 

(12) Airport model content. 
(a) Visual effect of strobe and beacon. 
Reposition to final approach, set weather 

to ‘‘Clear,’’ continue approach for an auto-
matic landing, and check the following: 

(13) Airport model content. 
(a) Visual cues during flare to assess sink 

rate. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00153

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

144 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

(b) Visual cues during flare to assess Depth 

perception. 

(c) Flight deck height above ground. 
After Landing Operations. 
(1) After Landing Checks. 
(2) Taxi back to gate. Check the following: 
(a) Visual model satisfactory. 

(b) Parking brake operation satisfactory. 
(3) Shutdown Checks. 
q. Crash Function. 
(1) Gear-up Crash. 
(2) Excessive rate of descent Crash. 
(3) Excessive bank angle Crash. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00154

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09MY08.005</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

145 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00155

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09MY08.008</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

146 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00156

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09MY08.009</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

147 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00157

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09MY08.010</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

148 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00158

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.054</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

149 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

A

TTACHMENT

TO

A

PPENDIX

TO

P

ART

60— 

F

IGURE

A4D—S

AMPLE

Q

UALIFICATION

T

EST

 

G

UIDE

C

OVER

P

AGE

 

INFORMATION 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00159

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.055</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

150 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00160

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.056</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

151 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

A

TTACHMENT

TO

A

PPENDIX

TO

P

ART

60— 

F

IGURE

A4E—S

AMPLE

S

TATEMENT OF

Q

UALI

-

FICATION

—C

ERTIFICATE

 

INFORMATION 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00161

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09DE22.127</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

152 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00162

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09MY08.014</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

153 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00163

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09MY08.015</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

154 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00164

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8006

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09MY08.016</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

155 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

A

TTACHMENT

TO

A

PPENDIX

TO

P

ART

60—F

IGURE

A4H [R

ESERVED

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00165

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8026

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09MY08.017</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

156 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

A

TTACHMENT

TO

A

PPENDIX

TO

P

ART

60— 

S

IMULATOR

Q

UALIFICATION

R

EQUIREMENTS

 

FOR

W

INDSHEAR

T

RAINING

P

ROGRAM

U

SE

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

1. A

PPLICABILITY

 

This attachment applies to all simulators, 

regardless of qualification level, that are 
used to satisfy the training requirements of 
an FAA-approved low-altitude windshear 
flight training program, or any FAA-ap-
proved training program that addresses 
windshear encounters. 

2. S

TATEMENT OF

C

OMPLIANCE AND

C

APABILITY

 

(SOC) 

a. The sponsor must submit an SOC con-

firming that the aerodynamic model is based 
on flight test data supplied by the airplane 
manufacturer or other approved data pro-
vider. The SOC must also confirm that any 
change to environmental wind parameters, 
including variances in those parameters for 
windshear conditions, once inserted for com-
putation, result in the correct simulated per-
formance. This statement must also include 
examples of environmental wind parameters 
currently evaluated in the simulator (such 
as crosswind takeoffs, crosswind approaches, 
and crosswind landings). 

b. For simulators without windshear warn-

ing, caution, or guidance hardware in the 
original equipment, the SOC must also state 
that the simulation of the added hardware 
and/or software, including associated flight 
deck displays and annunciations, replicates 
the system(s) installed in the airplane. The 
statement must be accompanied by a block 
diagram depicting the input and output sig-
nal flow, and comparing the signal flow to 
the equipment installed in the airplane. 

3. M

ODELS

 

The windshear models installed in the sim-

ulator software used for the qualification 
evaluation must do the following: 

a. Provide cues necessary for recognizing 

windshear onset and potential performance 
degradation requiring a pilot to initiate re-
covery procedures. The cues must include all 
of the following, as appropriate for the por-
tion of the flight envelope: 

(1) Rapid airspeed change of at least 

±

15 

knots (kts). 

(2) Stagnation of airspeed during the take-

off roll. 

(3) Rapid vertical speed change of at least 

±

500 feet per minute (fpm). 

(4) Rapid pitch change of at least 

±

5

°

b. Be adjustable in intensity (or other pa-

rameter to achieve an intensity effect) to at 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00166

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

ER09MY08.019</GPH>

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

157 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

least two (2) levels so that upon encoun-
tering the windshear the pilot may identify 
its presence and apply the recommended pro-
cedures for escape from such a windshear. 

(1) If the intensity is lesser, the perform-

ance capability of the simulated airplane in 
the windshear permits the pilot to maintain 
a satisfactory flightpath; and 

(2) If the intensity is greater, the perform-

ance capability of the simulated airplane in 
the windshear does not permit the pilot to 
maintain a satisfactory flightpath (crash). 
Note: The means used to accomplish the 
‘‘nonsurvivable’’ scenario of paragraph 3.b.(2) 
of this attachment, that involve operational 
elements of the simulated airplane, must re-
flect the dispatch limitations of the air-
plane. 

c. Be available for use in the FAA-approved 

windshear flight training program. 

4. D

EMONSTRATIONS

 

a. The sponsor must identify one surviv-

able takeoff windshear training model and 
one survivable approach windshear training 
model. The wind components of the surviv-
able models must be presented in graphical 
format so that all components of the 
windshear are shown, including initiation 
point, variance in magnitude, and time or 
distance correlations. The simulator must be 
operated at the same gross weight, airplane 
configuration, and initial airspeed during the 
takeoff demonstration (through calm air and 
through the first selected survivable 
windshear), and at the same gross weight, 
airplane configuration, and initial airspeed 
during the approach demonstration (through 
calm air and through the second selected 
survivable windshear). 

b. In each of these four situations, at an 

‘‘initiation point’’ (i.e., where windshear 
onset is or should be recognized), the rec-
ommended procedures for windshear recov-
ery are applied and the results are recorded 
as specified in paragraph 5 of this attach-
ment. 

c. These recordings are made without in-

serting programmed random turbulence. 
Turbulence that results from the windshear 
model is to be expected, and no attempt may 
be made to neutralize turbulence from this 
source. 

d. The definition of the models and the re-

sults of the demonstrations of all four?(4) 
cases described in paragraph 4.a of this at-
tachment, must be made a part of the 
MQTG. 

5. R

ECORDING

P

ARAMETERS

 

a. In each of the four MQTG cases, an elec-

tronic recording (time history) must be made 
of the following parameters: 

(1) Indicated or calibrated airspeed. 
(2) Indicated vertical speed. 
(3) Pitch attitude. 

(4) Indicated or radio altitude. 
(5) Angle of attack. 
(6) Elevator position. 
(7) Engine data (thrust, N1, or throttle po-

sition). 

(8) Wind magnitudes (simple windshear 

model assumed). 

b. These recordings must be initiated at 

least 10 seconds prior to the initiation point, 
and continued until recovery is complete or 
ground contact is made. 

6. E

QUIPMENT

I

NSTALLATION AND

O

PERATION

 

All windshear warning, caution, or guid-

ance hardware installed in the simulator 
must operate as it operates in the airplane. 
For example, if a rapidly changing wind 
speed and/or direction would have caused a 
windshear warning in the airplane, the simu-
lator must respond equivalently without in-
structor/evaluator intervention. 

7. Q

UALIFICATION

T

EST

G

UIDE

 

a. All QTG material must be forwarded to 

the responsible Flight Standards office. 

b. A simulator windshear evaluation will 

be scheduled in accordance with normal pro-
cedures. Continuing qualification evaluation 
schedules will be used to the maximum ex-
tent possible. 

c. During the on-site evaluation, the eval-

uator will ask the operator to run the per-
formance tests and record the results. The 
results of these on-site tests will be com-
pared to those results previously approved 
and placed in the QTG or MQTG, as appro-
priate. 

d. QTGs for new (or MQTGs for upgraded) 

simulators must contain or reference the in-
formation described in paragraphs 2, 3, 4, and 
5 of this attachment. 

E

ND

QPS R

EQUIREMENTS

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

B

EGIN

I

NFORMATION

 

8. S

UBJECTIVE

E

VALUATION

 

The responsible Flight Standards office 

will fly the simulator in at least two of the 
available windshear scenarios to subjectively 
evaluate simulator performance as it en-
counters the programmed windshear condi-
tions. 

a. One scenario will include parameters 

that enable the pilot to maintain a satisfac-
tory flightpath. 

b. One scenario will include parameters 

that will not enable the pilot to maintain a 
satisfactory flightpath (crash). 

c. Other scenarios may be examined at the 

responsible Flight Standards office’s discre-
tion. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00167

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

158 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

9. Q

UALIFICATION

B

ASIS

 

The addition of windshear programming to 

a simulator in order to comply with the 
qualification for required windshear training 
does not change the original qualification 
basis of the simulator. 

10. D

EMONSTRATION

R

EPEATABILITY

 

For the purposes of demonstration repeat-

ability, it is recommended that the simu-
lator be flown by means of the simulator’s 
autodrive function (for those simulators that 
have autodrive capability) during the dem-
onstrations. 

E

ND

I

NFORMATION

 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

A

TTACHMENT

TO

A

PPENDIX

TO

P

ART

60— 

FSTD D

IRECTIVES

A

PPLICABLE TO

A

IRPLANE

 

F

LIGHT

S

IMULATORS

 

F

LIGHT

S

IMULATION

T

RAINING

D

EVICE

(FSTD) 

D

IRECTIVE

 

FSTD Directive 1. Applicable to all Full 

Flight Simulators (FFS), regardless of the 
original qualification basis and qualification 
date (original or upgrade), having Class II or 
Class III airport models available. 

Agency:  Federal Aviation Administration 

(FAA), DOT. 

Action: This is a retroactive requirement to 

have all Class II or Class III airport models 
meet current requirements. 

llllllllllllllllllllllll

Summary:  Notwithstanding the authoriza-

tion listed in paragraph 13b in Appendices A 
and C of this part, this FSTD Directive re-
quires each certificate holder to ensure that 
by May 30, 2009, except for the airport 
model(s) used to qualify the simulator at the 
designated level, each airport model used by 
the certificate holder’s instructors or eval-
uators for training, checking, or testing 
under this chapter in an FFS, meets the defi-
nition of a Class II or Class III airport model 
as defined in 14CFR part 60. The completion 
of this requirement will not require a report, 
and the method used for keeping instructors 
and evaluators apprised of the airport mod-
els that meet Class II or Class III require-
ments on any given simulator is at the op-
tion of the certificate holder whose employ-
ees are using the FFS, but the method used 
must be available for review by the TPAA 
for that certificate holder. 

Dates:  FSTD Directive 1 becomes effective 

on May 30, 2008. 

S

PECIFIC

R

EQUIREMENTS

1. Part 60 requires that each FSTD be: 
a. Sponsored by a person holding or apply-

ing for an FAA operating certificate under 
Part 119, Part 141, or Part 142, or holding or 
applying for an FAA-approved training pro-

gram under Part 63, Appendix C, for flight 
engineers, and 

b. Evaluated and issued an SOQ for a spe-

cific FSTD level. 

2. FFSs also require the installation of a 

visual system that is capable of providing an 
out-of-the-flight-deck view of airport mod-
els. However, historically these airport mod-
els were not routinely evaluated or required 
to meet any standardized criteria. This has 
led to qualified simulators containing air-
port models being used to meet FAA-ap-
proved training, testing, or checking require-
ments with potentially incorrect or inappro-
priate visual references. 

3. To prevent this from occurring in the fu-

ture, by May 30, 2009, except for the airport 
model(s) used to qualify the simulator at the 
designated level, each certificate holder 
must assure that each airport model used for 
training, testing, or checking under this 
chapter in a qualified FFS meets the defini-
tion of a Class II or Class III airport model 
as defined in Appendix F of this part. 

4. These references describe the require-

ments for visual scene management and the 
minimum distances from which runway or 
landing area features must be visible for all 
levels of simulator. The airport model must 
provide, for each ‘‘in-use runway’’ or ‘‘in-use 
landing area,’’ runway or landing area sur-
face and markings, runway or landing area 
lighting, taxiway surface and markings, and 
taxiway lighting. Additional requirements 
include correlation of the v airport models 
with other aspects of the airport environ-
ment, correlation of the aircraft and associ-
ated equipment, scene quality assessment 
features, and the control of these models the 
instructor must be able to exercise. 

5. For circling approaches, all require-

ments of this section apply to the runway 
used for the initial approach and to the run-
way of intended landing. 

6. The details in these models must be de-

veloped using airport pictures, construction 
drawings and maps, or other similar data, or 
developed in accordance with published regu-
latory material. However, this FSTD DIREC-
TIVE 1 does not require that airport models 
contain details that are beyond the initially 
designed capability of the visual system, as 
currently qualified. The recognized limita-
tions to visual systems are as follows: 

a. Visual systems not required to have run-

way numbers as a part of the specific runway 
marking requirements are: 

(1) Link NVS and DNVS. 
(2) Novoview 2500 and 6000. 
(3) FlightSafety VITAL series up to, and 

including, VITAL III, but not beyond. 

(4) Redifusion SP1, SP1T, and SP2. 
b. Visual systems required to display run-

way numbers only for LOFT scenes are: 

(1) FlightSafety VITAL IV. 
(2) Redifusion SP3 and SP3T. 
(3) Link-Miles Image II. 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00168

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

159 

Federal Aviation Administration, DOT 

Pt. 60, App. A 

c. Visual systems not required to have ac-

curate taxiway edge lighting are: 

(1) Redifusion SP1. 
(2) FlightSafety Vital IV. 
(3) Link-Miles Image II and Image IIT 
(4) XKD displays (even though the XKD 

image generator is capable of generating 
blue colored lights, the display cannot ac-
commodate that color). 

7. A copy of this Directive must be filed in 

the MQTG in the designated FSTD Directive 
Section, and its inclusion must be annotated 
on the Index of Effective FSTD Directives 
chart. See Attachment 4, Appendices A 
through D for a sample MQTG Index of Effec-
tive FSTD Directives chart. 

F

LIGHT

S

IMULATION

T

RAINING

D

EVICE

(FSTD) 

D

IRECTIVE

 

FSTD Directive 2. Applicable to all air-

plane Full Flight Simulators (FFS), regard-
less of the original qualification basis and 
qualification date (original or upgrade), used 
to conduct full stall training, upset recovery 
training, airborne icing training, and other 
flight training tasks as described in this Di-
rective. 

Agency: Federal Aviation Administration 

(FAA), DOT. 

Action: This is a retroactive requirement 

for any FSTD being used to obtain training, 
testing, or checking credit in an FAA ap-
proved flight training program for the spe-
cific training maneuvers as defined in this 
Directive. 

Summary: Notwithstanding the authoriza-

tion listed in paragraph 13b in Appendix A of 
this Part, this FSTD Directive requires that 
each FSTD sponsor conduct additional sub-
jective and objective testing, conduct re-
quired modifications, and apply for addi-
tional FSTD qualification under § 60.16 to 
support continued qualification of the fol-
lowing flight training tasks where training, 
testing, or checking credit is being sought in 
a selected FSTD being used in an FAA ap-
proved flight training program: 

a. Recognition of and Recovery from a Full 

Stall 

b. Upset Prevention and Recovery 
c. Engine and Airframe Icing 
d. Takeoff and Landing with Gusting Cross-

winds 

e. Recovery from a Bounced Landing 

The FSTD sponsor may elect to apply for ad-
ditional qualification for any, all, or none of 
the above defined training tasks for a par-
ticular FSTD. After March 12, 2019, any 
FSTD used to conduct the above training 
tasks must be evaluated and issued addi-
tional qualification by the responsible Flight 
Standards office as defined in this Directive. 

Dates: FSTD Directive No. 2 becomes effec-

tive on May 31, 2016. 

S

PECIFIC

R

EQUIREMENTS

 

1. Part 60 requires that each FSTD be: 

a. Sponsored by a person holding or apply-

ing for an FAA operating certificate under 
Part 119, Part 141, or Part 142, or holding or 
applying for an FAA-approved training pro-
gram under Part 63, Appendix C, for flight 
engineers, and 

b. Evaluated and issued a Statement of 

Qualification (SOQ) for a specific FSTD 
level. 

2. The evaluation criteria contained in this 

Directive is intended to address specific 
training tasks that require additional eval-
uation to ensure adequate FSTD fidelity. 

3. The requirements described in this Di-

rective define additional qualification cri-
teria for specific training tasks that are ap-
plicable only to those FSTDs that will be 
utilized to obtain training, testing, or check-
ing credit in an FAA approved flight training 
program. In order to obtain additional quali-
fication for the tasks described in this Direc-
tive, FSTD sponsors must request additional 
qualification in accordance with § 60.16 and 
the requirements of this Directive. FSTDs 
that are found to meet the requirements of 
this Directive will have their Statement of 
Qualification (SOQ) amended to reflect the 
additional training tasks that the FSTD has 
been qualified to conduct. The additional 
qualification requirements as defined in this 
Directive are divided into the following 
training tasks: 

a. Section I—Additional Qualification Re-

quirements for Full Stall Training Tasks 

b. Section II—Additional Qualification Re-

quirements for Upset Prevention and Re-
covery Training Tasks 

c. Section III—Additional Qualification Re-

quirements for Engine and Airframe Icing 
Training Tasks 

d. Section IV—Additional Qualification Re-

quirements for Takeoff and Landing in 
Gusting Crosswinds 

e. Section V—Additional Qualification Re-

quirements for Bounced Landing Recovery 
Training Tasks 

4. A copy of this Directive (along with all 

required Statements of Compliance and ob-
jective test results) must be filed in the 
MQTG in the designated FSTD Directive 
Section, and its inclusion must be annotated 
on the Index of Effective FSTD Directives 
chart. See Attachment 4, Appendix A for a 
sample MQTG Index of Effective FSTD Di-
rectives chart. 

S

ECTION

I—E

VALUATION

R

EQUIREMENTS FOR

 

F

ULL

S

TALL

T

RAINING

T

ASKS

 

1. This section applies to previously quali-

fied Level C and Level D FSTDs being used 
to obtain credit for stall training maneuvers 
beyond the first indication of a stall (such as 

VerDate Sep<11>2014 

14:00 Mar 14, 2024

Jkt 262047

PO 00000

Frm 00169

Fmt 8010

Sfmt 8002

Q:\14\14V2.TXT

PC31

aworley on LAPBH6H6L3 with DISTILLER

background image

160 

14 CFR Ch. I (1–1–24 Edition) 

Pt. 60, App. A 

stall warning system activation, stick shak-
er, etc.) in an FAA approved training pro-
gram. 

2. The evaluation requirements in this Di-

rective are intended to validate FSTD fidel-
ity at angles of attack sufficient to identify 
the stall, to demonstrate aircraft perform-
ance degradation in the stall, and to dem-
onstrate recovery techniques from a fully 
stalled flight condition. 

3. After March 12, 2019, any FSTD being 

used to obtain credit for full stall training 
maneuvers in an FAA approved training pro-
gram must be evaluated and issued addi-
tional qualification in accordance with this 
Directive and the following sections of Ap-
pendix A of this Part: 

a. Table A1A, General Requirements, Section 

2.m. (High Angle of Attack Modeling) 

b. Table A1A, General Requirements, Section 

3.f. (Stick Pusher System) [where applica-
ble] 

c. Table A2A, Objective Testing Require-

ments, Test 2.a.10 (Stick Pusher Force 
Calibration) [where applicable] 

d. Table A2A, Objective Testing Require-

ments, Test 2.c.8.a (Stall Characteristics) 

e. Table A2A, Objective Testing Require-

ments, Test 3.f.5 (Characteristic Motion 
Vibrations—Stall Buffet) [See paragraph 4 
of this section for applicability on pre-
viously qualified FSTDs] 

f. Table A3A, Functions and Subjective Test-

ing Requirements, Test 5.b.1.b. (High Angle 
of Attack Maneuvers) 

g. Attachment 7, Additional Simulator Qual-

ification Requirements for Stall, Upset 
Prevention and Recovery, and Engine and 
Airframe Icing Training Tasks (High Angle 
of Attack Model Evaluation) 

4. For FSTDs initially qualified before May 

31, 2016, including FSTDs that are initially 
qualified under the grace period conditions 
as defined in § 60.15(c): 

a. Objective testing for stall characteristics 

(Table A2A, test 2.c.8.a.) will only be re-
quired for the (wings level) second segment 
climb and approach or landing flight condi-
tions. In lieu of objective testing for the 
high altitude cruise and turning flight 
stall conditions, these maneuvers may be 
subjectively evaluated by a qualified sub-
ject matter expert (SME) pilot and ad-
dressed in the required statement of com-
pliance. 

b. Where existing flight test validation data 

in the FSTD’s Master Qualification Test 
Guide (MQTG) is missing required param-
eters or is otherwise unsuitable to fully 
meet the objective testing requirements of 
this Directive, the FAA may accept alter-
nate sources of validation, including sub-
jective validation by an SME pilot with di-
rect experience in the stall characteristics 
of the aircraft. 

c. Objective testing for characteristic mo-

tion vibrations (Stall buffet—Table A2A, 
test 3.f.5) is not required where the FSTD’s 
stall buffets have been subjectively evalu-
ated by an SME pilot. For previously 
qualified Level D FSTDs that currently 
have objective stall buffet tests in their ap-
proved MQTG, the results of these existing 
tests must be provided to the FAA with the 
updated stall and stall buffet models in 
place. 

d. As described in Attachment 7 of this Ap-

pendix, the FAA may accept a statement 
of compliance from the data provider 
which confirms the stall characteristics 
have been subjectively evaluated by an 
SME pilot on an engineering simulator or 
development simulator that is acceptable 
to the FAA. Where this evaluation takes 
place on an engineering or development 
simulator, additional objective ‘‘proof-of- 
match’’ testing for all flight conditions as 
described in tests 2.c.8.a. and 3.f.5.will be 
required to verify the implementation of 
the stall model and stall buffets on the 
training FSTD. 

5. Where qualification is being sought to 

conduct full stall training tasks in accord-
ance with this Directive, the FSTD Sponsor 
must conduct the required evaluations and 
modifications as prescribed in this Directive 
and report compliance to the responsible 
Flight Standards office in accordance with 
§ 60.23 using the standardized FSTD Sponsor 
Notification Form. At a minimum, this form 
must be accompanied with the following in-
formation: 

a. A description of any modifications to the 

FSTD (in accordance with § 60.23) necessary 
to meet the requirements of this Directive. 

b. Statements of Comp